division 0 procurement and contracting requirements · index continues with mp&e sections on...

DIVISION 0 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Index to Sections Drawing Index BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Section 00 11 16 Invitation to Bid 1 Section 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders 4 Section 00 25 13 Pre-Bid Meetings 1 Section 00 31 26 Asbestos Survey Information 14 Section 00 41 13 Bid Form 3 Section 00 45 21 Drug-Free Workplace Affidavit 1 Section 00 47 13 Construction Bid Envelope 1 CONTRACT FORMS Section 00 52 13 Agreement Between Owner and Contractor 4 Section 00 61 13 Contract Bond 2 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT Section 00 72 13 General Conditions 53 DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 Summary 2 Section 01 21 13 Allowances 1 Section 01 21 15 List of Allowances 1 Section 01 25 13 Product Substitution Procedures 1 Section 01 25 33 Product Substitution Request Form 2 Section 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 1 Section 01 26 20 Weather Delays 2 Section 01 26 25 Weather Delay Report 1 Section 01 26 40 Form for Amendment, Change Order or Directive 1 Section 01 26 54 Form for Price Summary 1 Section 01 26 55 Form for Price of Work 1 Section 01 26 56 Form for Price of Time 1 Section 01 29 54 Retainage Escrow Initiation 2 Section 01 29 73 Schedule of Values 1 Section 01 29 76 Progress Payment Procedures 4 Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings 2 Section 01 31 90 Administrative Logs 1 Section 01 31 93 Visitor Log 1 Section 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 2 Section 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation 2 Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 9 Section 01 41 15 Basic Regulatory Requirements 2 Section 01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services 1 Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 2 Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements 2 Section 01 73 10 Cutting and Patching 4 Section 01 74 00 Cleaning and Waste Management 1 Section 01 77 70 Closeout Procedures 3 Section 01 78 01 Close-Out Submittals 3 Section 01 78 25 Data Binder Receipt 1 Section 01 78 88 Report of Subcontractors and Suppliers 1 Section 01 79 21 Demonstration and Training 1 Section 01 79 25 Demonstration and Verification 2 Section 01 81 14 High Performance Building Requirements 7 Section 01 91 13 Commissioning 3 Section 01 91 23 Performance Testing Identification Form 1

Section 01 91 26 Performance Testing Procedures Form 1 Section 01 91 29 Functional Performance Test Certification 1 DIVISIONS 2 THRU 5 - NOT USED DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06105 – Miscellaneous Carpentry 1-5 Section 06402 – Interior Architectural Woodwork 1-9 DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07210 – Building Insulation 1-4 Section 07920 – Joint Sealants 1-7 DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08110 – Steel Doors and Frames 1-6 Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors 1-5 Section 08411 – Aluminum Framed Storefronts 1-8 Section 08712 – Door Hardware 1-32 Section 08800 – Glazing 1-7 DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09260 – Gypsum Board Assemblies 1-11 Section 09310 – Ceramic Tile 1-4 Section 09330 – Synthetic Marble 1-1 Section 09511 – Acoustical Panel Ceilings 1-6 Section 09651 – Resilient Flooring 1-5 Section 09680 – Carpet Tile 1-5 Section 09912 – Painting 1-11 DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10520 – Fire Protection Specialties 1-5 Section 10801 – Toilet and Bath Accessories 1-4 DIVISION 11 – NOT USED DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Section 12 24 00 – Shades 1-5 DIVISIONS 13 THRU 14 – NOT USED INDEX CONTINUES WITH MP&E SECTIONS ON FOLLOWING PAGE

APSU MRC SPECIFICATION INDEX – HNA ENGINEERING

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 220529 HANGERS & SUPPORTS - PLUMBING 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 223300 ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER 224213 COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS 224214 COMMERCIAL URINALS 224216 COMMERCIAL SINKS 224217 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES 224713 DRINKING FOUNTAINS

DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL 230100 GENERAL PROVISIONS, MECHANICAL 230500 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230713 DUCT INSULATION 233100 LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK 233300 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

260100 GENERAL PROVISIONS, ELECTRICAL 260500 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS, ELECTRICAL 260526 GROUNDING AND BOUNDING 260926 PANELBOARDS 265500 LUMINAIRES

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

277440 COMMUNICATIONS

INDEX TO DRAWINGS T1.0 TITLE SHEET A0.1 MAIN FLOOR CODE PLAN A0.2 EXISTING BASEMENT FLOOR PLAN A0.3 EXISTING BASEMENT MEZZANINE FLOOR PLAN A1.0 DEMOLITION PLAN & COORDINATION PLAN A2.0 MAIN FLOOR PLAN & DIMENSIONED PLAN A2.1 SUGGESTED FURNITURE LAYOUT & REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A3.0 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A4.0 DOOR AND FINISH SCHEDULES A5.0 BUILDING SECTIONS A5.1 BUILDING SECTION & DETAILS A6.0 ENLARGED PLANS A6.1 CASEWORK ELEVATIONS A6.2 CASEWORK DETAILS M.01 LEGENDS AND NOTES - MECHANICAL M1.1 FLOOR PLANS - MECHANICAL M2.1 DETAILS & SCHEDULES - MECHANICAL P0.1 NOTES & SCHEDULES - PLUMBING P0.2 DETAILS - PLUMBING P1.1 FLOOR PLANS - PLUMBING E0.1 LEGENDS & SCHEDULES - ELECTRICAL E0.2 PANEL SCHEDULES - ELECTRICAL E0.3 ONE LINE DIAGRAM - ELECTRICAL E0.4 DETAILS - ELECTRICAL ED1.1 DEMO FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL E2.1 FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING, POWER & COMM.

00 11 16 – INVITATION TO BID

TN Higher Education – Standard Document – May 2018 Page 1 of 1

PROJECT:

MILITARY FAMILY RESOURCE CENTER RENOVATIONS

SBC Number 373/003-02-2019

Austin Peay State University

Clarksville, Tennessee

INVITATION:

The State of Tennessee is inviting General Contractor bids for the Work of this project. Examine documents at the Designer's office or Plan Rooms on or after January 13, 2020.

Bidding Documents in PDF format may be obtained at no cost from the following source.

Designer's Office: Lyle Cook Martin Architects (931) 552-4771

Entities obtaining Bidding Documents become Bidders of Record for notifications. Bidders of Record may purchase hard copies of Bidding Documents from the same source (nonrefundable).

Bidders shall be licensed and qualified per state law. Five percent (5%) Bid Security is required in the form of a Bid Bond or check (certified or cashier’s) made payable to State of Tennessee. Non-discrimination policy applies.

BIDS RECEIVED AT:

University Design & Construction

255 Marion Streeet, Suite 10, Clarksville, TN 37040

Until 2:00 P.M., local time

On February 13, 2020

PRE-BID CONFERENCE AT:

University Design & Construction

255 Marion Streeet, Suite 10, Clarksville, TN 37040

At 2:00 P.M., local time

On January 30, 2020

PLAN ROOMS:

iSqFt Plan Room & TN AGC

Builders Exchange of Tennessee

ProGraphics Blueprint Company

DESIGNER:

Lyle Cook Martin Architects

310 Franklin St., Suite B, Clarksville, TN 37040

END OF SECTION

00 21 13 – INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 BIDDING DOCUMENTS

A. Bidding Documents may be obtained by Bidders and Subcontractors as describedin the Invitation to Bid.

B. Bidders of Record will be issued subsequent addenda.1.02 EXAMINATION

A. Bidders shall carefully examine site and documents to obtain first-hand knowledgeof existing conditions and Work proposed.

B. Contractor will not be given extra payment for conditions which can be determinedby examining site and documents.

1.03 QUESTIONS A. Bidders shall submit questions about bidding documents to Designer in writing.

Replies will be issued to Bidders of Record by addenda and will become part ofContract Documents. Designer and Owner will not make oral clarifications.

B. Questions shall be received by Designer at least six calendar days before bidopening date.

C. Normal practice is that no addenda affecting pricing will be issued less than threecalendar days before bid opening date.

1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitution requests before receipt of bids shall be prepared in accordance with

01 25 13 Product Substitution Procedures.B. Substitution requests before receipt of bids shall be received ten calendar days

before date set to receive bids. However, regardless of the date received,consideration of substitution requests is not an obligation of the Designer or Ownerand the Designer will determine if sufficient time is available for evaluation of therequest.

C. Acceptable substitutions will be identified in addenda.D. Bidders submitting bids in reliance upon a substitution when the substitution has

not been approved prior to bidding do so at their own risk.1.05 LICENSING AND QUALIFICATIONS

A. Bidders shall be familiar with the Contractors Licensing Act of 1976, ascurrently amended (codified in Tennessee Code Annotated (TCA) §62-6-101, et seq.). A contract will not be awarded to a bidder whose bid is inconflict with State licensing law.

B. Bidders with five or more employees are required by TCA § 50-9-113 to submit acompleted Section 00 45 21 Drug-Free Workplace Affidavit with their bid thatattests they have a complying drug-free workplace program.

C. In compliance with TCA § 50-9-114 bidders are advised that the Owner does notoperate a certified drug-free workplace program that serves for compliance withTCA § 50-9-113.



D. Bids submitted shall not include a contractor or subcontractor disqualified fromparticipating in State Building Commission projects. The State Architect maintainsa list of those that are disqualified.

E. The bidder and its subcontractors shall not knowingly utilize the services of anillegal immigrant in the performance of the Work, and shall not knowingly utilize theservices of any subcontractor, sub-subcontractor, or consultant who utilizes theservices of an illegal immigrant in the performance of the Work.

F. In compliance with the Iran Divestment Act bids submitted shall not include acontractor or subcontractor on the list created pursuant to TCA § 12-12-106.

1.06 BID FORM A. Make bids on an unaltered Bid Form. Submit one Bid Form. Failure to completely

fill out Bid Form may cause bid to be rejected.B. To indicate availability of an Add Alternate at no additional charge, write "No

Charge" in the space. Additional stipulations or qualifications on Bid Form maycause bid to be rejected.

C. Bid Form shall be signed by person or persons legally authorized to bind Bidder tocontract.

1.07 BID SECURITY (NOT APPLICABLE IF BOX CHECKED)A. Bid Security is required in the amount of five percent (5%) of total amount of bid,

including alternates, in the form of a Bid Bond or check (certified or cashier’s)made payable to State of Tennessee.

B. Bid Bonds shall be issued by Surety company licensed to do business inTennessee by Tennessee Department of Commerce and Insurance, and shallhave certified and current Power-of-Attorney for Attorney-in-Fact attached.

C. Owner may retain Bid Security of bidders to whom award is being considered untileither (a) Contract has been executed, or (b) specified time has elapsed so that bidis not binding, or (c) bid has been rejected. If Bidder refuses to enter into Contractor fails to furnish all required attachments properly executed, the amount of BidSecurity shall be forfeited to Owner as liquidated damages, not as penalty.

1.08 BID SUBMITTAL A. Submit Bid Form, with required attachments, enclosed and sealed in a 9 inch by 12

inch Bid Envelope with Bid Envelope cover information as provided in Section00 47 13 attached to the Bid Envelope. Bidder shall fill in blank spaces on face ofEnvelope except the blank space provided for Designer's approval.

B. If any work, regardless of dollar value, is required for any or of the subcontracttrades listed on the Bid Envelope form, list subcontractor(s) that will perform thatwork. If Bidder will perform that work with Bidder's own forces, fill in Bidder’s nameas subcontractor. If no work is required in a category, write “None Required” inspace provided for subcontractor(s). If acceptance of Alternate or combination ofAlternates changes subcontractor, indicate change on Bid Envelope.

C. Provide State contractor license number, expiration date, and applicableclassifications for Bidder and listed subcontractors, as applicable by State licensinglaw.



D. Bidders are solely responsible for ensuring that bids are received by the time andat the place identified for receipt of bids. The bid opening time shall be establishedby the timepiece of the Owner’s representative. Bids received late will be returnedunopened.

E. A bid sent by mail or courier shall be enclosed in an envelope clearly marked "BidEnvelope Enclosed".

1.09 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL PRIOR TO CLOSE OF BIDDING A. Modification: Bids, once submitted, may be modified before the scheduled

opening time only upon receipt of a written modification signed by a person legallyauthorized to bind Bidder to contract. Modification to a bid may be made as an“Add” or “Deduct” only. Modification to bid may be written on the Bid Envelopewith the signature of an authorized representative of the Bidder also written on theBid Envelope. Modification shall indicate only the amount of change, clearlyidentified as an “Add” or “Deduct”, and not indicate either the prior or resulting bidamount.

B. Withdrawal: Bids, once submitted, may be withdrawn before the scheduledopening time only upon receipt of a written withdrawal request signed by a personlegally authorized to bind Bidder to contract.

1.10 POST-BID WITHDRAWAL OF BID FROM CONSIDERATION DUE TO MISTAKE A request to withdraw a bid due to a mistake shall follow the Policy and Procedure of the State Building Commission. In addition to the requirements therein, such requests shall be delivered in writing to the Owner not later than twenty-four hours after the time fixed for receipt and opening of bids.

1.11 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS A. To be considered, bids shall be made in accordance with these Instructions to

Bidders. Failure to comply with these requirements may cause bid to be rejected.B. The Owner reserves right to: reject Unit Prices proposed in a bid without

invalidating other portions of bid; reject a bid which does not provide all requiredUnit Prices; waive informalities; and, reject any or all bids.

C. It is Owner's intent to award contract based upon lowest evaluated responsive bidsubmitted by responsible Bidder for Base Bid plus Alternates (if any) taken in orderup to, but not to exceed the Bid Target. If the Base Bid of all bidders exceeds theestablished Bid Target, the low Bidder is determined by the lowest Base Bidsubmitted by a responsible Bidder irrespective of any Alternates (if any) bid. WhenAlternates are included in bidding, Bid Target will be announced at bid openingprior to opening bids. Alternates may be accepted or rejected at Owner'sdiscretion, provided that final combination of Base Bid and accepted Alternatesdoes not change low Bidder as established by above method.

D. In the event of tie bids, preference will be given to in-State bidder over out-of-Statebidder; and, if a tie still exists, successful Bidder will be determined by chance, e.g.a coin toss.

1.12 POST-BID INFORMATION Each Bidder shall be prepared, if requested by Owner or Designer, to present, within ten days of the request, evidence of experience, qualifications, and financial ability to carry out the terms of the contract.



1.13 BONDS (NOT APPLICABLE IF BOX CHECKED)A. If the initial Contract Sum as awarded exceeds $100,000, the successful Bidder

shall provide Contract Bond in an amount of 100 percent of Contract Sum and inaccordance with the requirements and form exhibited as Section 00 61 13.

B. The successful Bidder shall furnish, if applicable, a Three Year Roof Bond in anamount stipulated on the Bid Form and in accordance with the requirements andthe form exhibited as Section 00 61 43.

1.14 EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT A. If a Bidder is presented the written Agreement form for signing, then that Bidder

shall deliver to the Owner, within ten calendar days after presentation, the requirednumber of counterparts of the signed Agreement Form, Contract Bond, Roof Bond(if required), and certificates of insurance, ACH Credits Form, and W-9 federal taxform.

B. Failure of the Bidder to return the Agreement as stipulated above shall entitle theOwner to require forfeiture of Bid Security and to proceed with award to the nextlowest responsive Bidder.

1.15 AWARD OF THE CONTRACT Presentation of Agreement form by Owner to Bidder for signature does not constitute award of Contract. Contract shall not be considered awarded until Bidder has received a fully executed Agreement.

1.16 DIVERSITY PARTICIPATION A. It is the express desire of the Owner and the State Building Commission to include

an emphasis on diversity in its contractual relationships with contractors for theconstruction, demolition or renovation of State projects under jurisdiction of theCommission. The Commission acknowledges that firms who demonstrate andembrace diversity within their programs and policies are assisting the State inachieving its goals in building a more reflective marketplace of the communitywithin this State.

B. It is a requirement of all successful Bidders or proposers on projects under thejurisdiction of the State Building Commission that they report to the State thenames and amounts of contracts entered into with diversity-owned businesses ontheir contract with the State in order for the State to collect data on suchparticipation.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION

SECTION 00 25 13 – PRE-BID MEETINGS

SECTION 00 25 13 – PRE-BID MEETINGS - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PRE-BID MEETINGS

A. A Pre-Bid meeting will be held on January 30, 2020 at 2:00 p.m. at the offices of University Design and Construction, 255 Marion Street, Suite 10, Clarksville, Tennessee. All registered plan holding General Contractors are encouraged to attend. Be advised that the only access to site will be after this meeting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 00 25 13

00 31 26 – ASBESTOS SURVEY INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 PURPOSE

This section identifies information that was gathered solely for the use of the Designer, is not a Bidding Document, but is available for review by Bidders. Bidders have the entire responsibility for their interpretation and use of this information and shall not rely on the information for preparation of a bid.

1.02 ASBESTOS INVESTIGATION AND REPORT A. An investigation has been performed at the project site to determine the presence

and probable extent of asbestos in the existing building materials. B. The Owner is not responsible for variations in the actual composition of existing

materials. Bidders shall decide for themselves the character of the material to be encountered.

C. The report of the findings of this investigation is on file in the Designer's office, and may be reviewed there by any prospective Bidder of Record. Bidders should call ahead to schedule an appointment. A copy will be provided to any Bidder of Record upon request.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION

00 41 13 – BID FORM

TN Higher Education – Standard Document – August 2018 Page 1 of 3

TO: State of Tennessee FROM BIDDER:

FOR:

Project Title: Military Family Resource Center Renovation

Project SBC No.: 373/003-02-2019

A. The Bidder hereby acknowledges, attests, certifies, warrants, and assures that:

1. Bidder has received, read and understands the Bidding Documents and this bid is made in accordance therewith.

2. Bidder has visited the site and become familiar with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has correlated all observations with the requirements of the Bidding Documents.

3. Documents identified as “Information Available to Bidders” are prepared solely for the Designer's use in design of this Work and have not been relied upon in the preparation of this bid. The use and interpretation of such information for any purpose is entirely the responsibility of the using party.

4. Bidder shall not utilize the services of a contractor or subcontractor disqualified from participating in State Building Commission projects.

5. Bidder shall not knowingly utilize the services of an illegal immigrant in the performance of this Contract and shall not knowingly utilize the services of any subcontractor or consultant who will utilize the services of an illegal immigrant in the performance of this Contract.

6. In compliance with the Iran Divestment Act the Bidder is not on the list created pursuant to Tennessee Code Annotated (TCA) § 12-12-106 and shall not utilize any subcontractor on that list.

7. Bid Security, in the amount of five percent (5%) of the total amount of bid, including Alternates, is attached hereto.

8. A Drug-Free Workplace Affidavit, in the form of Section 00 45 21, is attached hereto.

9. Failure to complete this Bid Form, provide required attachments, or comply otherwise with instructions to Bidders, may be cause for rejection of bid.

10. The person who signs this bid on behalf of the Bidder is legally empowered to bind the Bidder to a Contract.

11. The following statement is (mark the one that is applicable) [ ] True [ ] False:

The Bidder and/or any of the Bidder's employees, agents, independent contractors and/or proposed Subcontractors have been convicted of, pled guilty to, or pled nolo contendere to any contract crime involving a public contract.

12. Bidder has received the following addenda:

Addendum No. dated . Addendum No. dated .

Addendum No. dated . Addendum No. dated .

00 41 13 – BID FORM


PAGE 2 FROM BIDDER:

B. The Bidder agrees to:

1. Honor this bid for 45 days following the date of the scheduled opening of bids. 2. Enter into and execute a contract, if presented on the basis of this bid, and to furnish

certificates(s) of insurance, bond(s), and other documents related to the contract as required, including, if the initial Contract Sum as awarded exceeds $100,000, the Contract Bond.

3. Accomplish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4. Furnish Three Year Roof Bond in the form of Section 00 61 43 in the amount of:

<<"Roof Bond Not Required">>.

5. Achieve Substantial Completion of the Work in accordance with the number of calendar days Contract Time set forth, allotted from and including the date stipulated in the Notice to Proceed; and, accept the conditions for Liquidated Damages in the amount set forth per calendar day.

Phase Commencement Contract Time Liquidated Damages

ALL Notice to Proceed for All Work 210 Days $150 Per Day

<<Name or "Not Applicable">> Days $ Per Day



C. BASE BID: The Bidder agrees to complete the Work of the Base Bid for this project for the lump sum of the following amount (In both words and figures. Figures prevail. Words clarify at Owner’s

discretion.):

and /100ths Dollars

$

D. ALTERNATES: The Bidder agrees to include Work of the following Alternate(s), as specified in Section 01 23 00 Alternates, for the additional lump sum(s) of the following amount(s) (In both words and figures. Figures prevail. Words clarify at Owner’s discretion.):

ALTERNATE No.1: <"Not Applicable">>

and /100ths Dollars

$

ALTERNATE No. 2: <<"Not Applicable">>

and /100ths Dollars

$

ALTERNATE No. 3: "Not Applicable">>

and /100ths Dollars

$

ALTERNATE No. 4: <<"Not Applicable">>

and /100ths Dollars

$

00 41 13 – BID FORM


E. UNIT PRICES: The Bidder agrees to include work in the Base Bid and Alternates as specified for the Quantity Allowance of Unit Price Items and propose, subject to Owner acceptance, the following Unit Prices for inclusion in the Agreement as specified in Section 01 22 13 Unit Prices:

<<"Not Applicable">>

Item No. Unit Price per Unit Unit Name, Work Included

F. BID SUBMITTAL:

This bid is submitted by:

Authorized Signature: Date:

Printed Name, Title:

On behalf of:

Bidder Name:

Bidder's Address:

Bidder's Phone:

Bidder's Fax:

Bidder's Email:

END OF SECTION

00 45 21 – DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE AFFIDAVIT


STATE OF ___________________ COUNTY OF _________________ The undersigned, principal officer of _______________________________, the Contractor, an

employer of five or more employees contracting with _______________________________,

the Owner, to provide construction services, hereby states under oath as follows:

1. The undersigned is a principal officer of the Contractor and is duly authorized to execute this Affidavit on behalf of the Contractor. 2. The Contractor submits this Affidavit pursuant to Tennessee Code Annotated (TCA) § 50-9-113, which requires each employer with five or more employees receiving pay who contracts with the state to provide construction services to submit an affidavit stating that such employer has a drug-free workplace program that complies with TCA Title 50, Chapter 9. 3. The Company is in compliance with TCA § 50-9-113. Further affiant saith not. ____________________________________________ Principal Officer STATE OF _____________________ COUNTY OF ___________________ Before me personally appeared ___________________________, with whom I am personally acquainted (or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence), and who acknowledged that such person executed the foregoing affidavit for the purposes therein contained. Witness my hand and seal at office this ____________ day of ___________________, 20____.

________________________________________________ Notary Public My commission expires:_______________________ END OF AFFIDAVIT

00 47 13 – CONSTRUCTION BID ENVELOPE


Bid to the State of Tennessee for Project:

Project Title:

SBC Number:

Institution:

City/County:

Project Designer:

Any blank spaces may cause bid to be unacceptable and rejected. Provide state contractor license number, expiration date, and classification

for Bidder and listed subcontractors as applicable. Provide all names as used for licensing.

Bidder Identification: Bidder:

Address:

Tennessee Contractor License Information: Or check here if Bidder is unlicensed.

License Number License Classification Applicable to Project

License Expiration Date Dollar Limit: $ .

Subcontractors to be used on this Project (or Bidder if Bidder is to perform the work): • If any work, regardless of dollar value, is required for trades below, list subcontractor(s) that

will perform that work, or, if Bidder will perform work in that category with Bidder’s own forces, fill in Bidder’s name as subcontractor.

• If no work is required in a subcontractor category, write “None Required”. • If the monetary amount of a subcontractor’s work is such that no license is require, write

“N/A” in the license number column, but still write name.

Name

License Number Expires Classification

Electrical

Geothermal

HVAC

Masonry

Plumbing

Roofing

This Bid Envelope approved for public opening

Signature of Designer or its representative

00 52 13 – AGREEMENT


Agreement

Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment is a

Stipulated Sum.

AGREEMENT made as of the <<Number, e.g. “2nd”>> day of <<Month>>

in the year of Twenty Nineteen.

BETWEEN THE OWNER: State of Tennessee, via the Contracting Agency:


255 Marion Street Suite 10

Clarksville, TN 37044

AND THE CONTRACTOR: <<Contractor Name>>

<<Street or P.O. Box>>

<<City, State, Zip Code>>

ACH Address: <<Street or P.O. Box>>


THE PROJECT:

<<SBC Number>>

APSU

<<Project Title Designated by Owner>>

THE DESIGNER:

<<Designer Name>>



THE OWNER AND THE CONTRACTOR AGREE AS SET FORTH BELOW.



ARTICLE 1 – THE WORK AND THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.1 The Contractor shall perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents for the Project identified on page one.

1.2 The Contract Documents are identified in the Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions). These form the Contract and constitute the entire agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. An enumeration of the Contract Documents appears in paragraph 1.4.

1.3 Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in the Conditions of the Contract shall have the meanings designated in those Conditions.

1.4 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated as follows:

1. This Agreement.

1. This Agreement.

2. Specifications dated:

3. Drawings dated:

4. Addendum #1 dated:





ARTICLE 2 – TIME OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

2.1 The Work to be performed under this Contract shall be commenced on the date stipulated in the Notice to Proceed; and, subject to authorized adjustments, Substantial Completion shall be achieved in

<<Number of calendar days from and including the date stipulated in the Notice to Proceed>>

2.2 Liquidated Damages, as set forth in the Conditions of the Contract, are

<<Dollar amount per calendar day>>

ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT SUM

3.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor in current funds for the performance of the Work, subject to Modifications as provided in the Contract Documents, the Contract Sum of

<<Contract Sum in words>>

($<<Contract Sum in numbers>>)

3.2 The Contract Sum is determined as follows:

<<Listing of base bid and any alternates and total>>

3.3 The following Unit Prices will be used as specified:

<<Listing or statement of none established at initial award>>



This instrument may be executed in one or more counterparts. It shall be fully executed when each party whose signature is required has signed at least one counterpart, even though no one counterpart contains the signatures of all the parties to this instrument. Electronic, scanned or facsimile signatures shall have the same force and effect as original signatures.

This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above as witnessed:

BY CONTRACTOR: <<Contractor Name>>

Signature:

Name:

Title: AND BY OWNER: State of Tennessee,


By:

Head of Higher Education Institution Alisa White APSU President

Approved:

Head of Financial Office Mitch Robinson APSU VP of Finance

Approved:

Head of Legal Office Dannelle Whiteside APSU Legal Counsel

Approved:

Head of State Procurement Agency Marc Brunner APSU UDC Director

Approved:

State Architect

END OF AGREEMENT FORM for the Project titled:

<<SBC Number>>





Agreement

Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment is a

Stipulated Sum.

AGREEMENT made as of the <<Number, e.g. “2nd”>> day of <<Month>>

in the year of Twenty Nineteen.

BETWEEN THE OWNER: State of Tennessee, via the Contracting Agency:


255 Marion Street Suite 10

Clarksville, TN 37044

AND THE CONTRACTOR: <<Contractor Name>>



ACH Address: <<Street or P.O. Box>>


THE PROJECT:

<<SBC Number>>

APSU


THE DESIGNER:

<<Designer Name>>



THE OWNER AND THE CONTRACTOR AGREE AS SET FORTH BELOW.



ARTICLE 1 – THE WORK AND THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.1 The Contractor shall perform all the Work required by the Contract Documents for the Project identified on page one.

1.2 The Contract Documents are identified in the Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions). These form the Contract and constitute the entire agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. An enumeration of the Contract Documents appears in paragraph 1.4.

1.3 Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in the Conditions of the Contract shall have the meanings designated in those Conditions.

1.4 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated as follows:

1. This Agreement.

1. This Agreement.

2. Specifications dated:

3. Drawings dated:






ARTICLE 2 – TIME OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

2.1 The Work to be performed under this Contract shall be commenced on the date stipulated in the Notice to Proceed; and, subject to authorized adjustments, Substantial Completion shall be achieved in

<<Number of calendar days from and including the date stipulated in the Notice to Proceed>>

2.2 Liquidated Damages, as set forth in the Conditions of the Contract, are

<<Dollar amount per calendar day>>

ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT SUM

3.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor in current funds for the performance of the Work, subject to Modifications as provided in the Contract Documents, the Contract Sum of

<<Contract Sum in words>>

($<<Contract Sum in numbers>>)

3.2 The Contract Sum is determined as follows:

<<Listing of base bid and any alternates and total>>

3.3 The following Unit Prices will be used as specified:

<<Listing or statement of none established at initial award>>



This instrument may be executed in one or more counterparts. It shall be fully executed when each party whose signature is required has signed at least one counterpart, even though no one counterpart contains the signatures of all the parties to this instrument. Electronic, scanned or facsimile signatures shall have the same force and effect as original signatures.

This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above as witnessed:

BY CONTRACTOR: <<Contractor Name>>

Signature:

Name:

Title: AND BY OWNER: State of Tennessee,


By:

Head of Higher Education Institution Alisa White APSU President

Approved:

Head of Financial Office Mitch Robinson APSU VP of Finance

Approved:

Head of Legal Office Dannelle Whiteside APSU Legal Counsel

Approved:

Head of State Procurement Agency Marc Brunner APSU UDC Director

Approved:

State Architect

END OF AGREEMENT FORM for the Project titled:

<<SBC Number>>



00 61 13 – CONTRACT BOND


Bond No. <<Number>>

TENNESSEE STATE BUILDING COMMISSION STANDARD FORM

Know all men by these presents: that we

<<Name>>

(hereinafter called the "Principal") and

<<Name>>

(hereinafter called the "Surety") do hereby acknowledge ourselves indebted and securely bound and held unto

State of Tennessee

<<State Procurement Agency>>

<<Address Line 1>>

<<Address Line 2>>

(hereinafter called the "Owner"), and in the penal sum of

<<Amount>>

good and lawful money of the United States of America, for the use and benefit of those entitled thereto, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, our administrators, executors, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

But the condition of the foregoing obligation or bond is this:

Whereas, the Owner has engaged the principal for the sum of

<<Amount>>

to complete the Work of the project titled: <<Title>>

SBC No. <<Number>>

as more fully appears in a written agreement or contract bearing the date of <<Date>>

a copy of which said agreement or contract is by reference hereby made a part thereof, as fully and to the same extent as if copied in length herein, and it is the desire of the Owner that the Principal shall assure all undertakings under said agreement or contract and shall assure and protect all laborers and furnishers of material on said Work both as provided by Tennessee Code Annotated Sections 4-15-102 (f)(2) and 12-4-201 through 12-4-206, and any and all amendments thereto, and shall assure the prompt payment of claims as provided by Tennessee Code Annotated Sections 12-4-207 through 12-4-208, and any and all amendments thereto. The Principal shall also comply with provisions of Tennessee Code Annotated Sections 12-4-401 through 12-4-415, and any and all amendments thereto, pertaining to the payment of the prevailing wage rate.

00 61 13 – CONTRACT BOND


Now, therefore, if the Principal shall fully and faithfully perform all undertakings and obligations under the contract hereinbefore referred to and shall fully indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from all costs and damage whatsoever which it may suffer by reason of any failure on the part of the Principal to do so, and shall fully reimburse and repay the Owner any and all outlay and expense which it may incur in making good any such default, and shall fully pay for all of the labor, material and work used by the Principal and any immediate or remote sub-contractor or furnisher of material under him in the performance of said contract, in lawful money of the United States, as the same shall become due, then this obligation or bond shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect.

And for value received, it is therefore stipulated and agreed that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the Work to be performed thereunder or to the specifications accompanying the same shall in any wise affect the obligation under this bond, and notice is hereby waived of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the Work or to the specifications.

In witness whereof the Principal has hereunto affixed its signature and Surety has hereunto caused to be affixed its corporate signature and seal, by its duly authorized officers, on this <<Day number>> day of <<Month>>, 20<<Year number>>.

Executed in <<Number>> counterparts.

Witness:

<<Name of Principal>> <<Name of Surety>> (Name of Principal) (Name of Surety)

(Authorized Signature) (Signature of Attorney-in-fact)

<<Name of Signatory>> <<Name of Attorney-in-fact>> (Name of Signatory) (Name of Attorney-in fact)

<<Title of Signatory>> <<License Number>> (Title of signatory) (Tennessee license number of Agent or Attorney-in-fact)

(Countersignature of resident Agent if not same as Attorney-in-fact)

Surety Company issuing bond shall be licensed to transact business in State of Tennessee by Tennessee Department of Commerce and Insurance. Bonds shall have certified and current Power-of-Attorney for the Surety's Attorney-in-Fact attached. Attorney-in-Fact who executes bond on behalf of Surety shall be licensed by and a resident of State of Tennessee, and shall affix license number to bond; or, countersignature by a licensed agent who is a resident of State of Tennessee, and the agent's license number, shall be affixed to the bond in addition to the signature of the Attorney-in-Fact.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 10 00 – SUMMARY

01 10 00 – SUMMARY - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: Interior renovations, modifications and upgrades to an existing building to become Austin Peay State University’s Military Family Resource Center.

1. Project Location: Property located at 426 College St. on the campus of Austin Peay State University, Clarksville, Tennessee.

2. Owner: Austin Peay State University

B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated November 26, 2019, were prepared for Project by Lyle . Cook . Martin Architects, 310 Franklin Street, Suite B, Clarksville, Tennessee 37040.

C. Briefly, and without force upon the Contract the work is generally as follows: Demolition includes removal of portions / or all of the existing interior walls, interior storefronts, doors & frames, floor finishes, ceilings, ductwork, electrical, plumbing, etc. 1. New work consists of:

a. New metal stud and drywall partitions to create new rooms. b. New doors, frames and hardware. c. New ceilings and light fixtures. d. New floor finishes throughout the renovated space. e. New restrooms and breakroom type plumbing. f. New shade film & partial concealing of perimeter storefront glazing panels. g. New exterior storefront entrance system.

1.2 USE OF PREMISES

A. General: The Contractor shall have limited use of exterior premises for construction operations, during construction period. The Contractor's use of premises is limited to staging areas indicated on drawings.

1.3 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.

1. Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

SECTION 01 10 00 – SUMMARY

01 10 00 – SUMMARY - 2

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


01 21 13 – ALLOWANCES


PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. B. Designate in construction progress schedule the delivery dates for products specified

under each allowance. 1.03 ADMINISTRATION

A. Contractor's duties in selection of products under allowances 1. Assist the Designer and Owner in determining qualified suppliers or installers. 2. Obtain bids from suppliers and installers when requested by the Designer. 3. Make appropriate recommendations for consideration of the Designer. 4. Notify the Designer promptly of:

a. Reasonable objections against a supplier, or party under consideration for installation.

b. Effect on the Construction Schedule anticipated by selections under consideration.

B. Adjustment of costs 1. Continuously monitor the use of each allowance and the anticipated use to

complete the Work. Do not exceed an allowance. 2. If an allowance is at risk of being exceeded, request a modification to increase

the allowance in a timely manner to avoid delay in the Work. 3. If all of the Work of an allowance is complete and there is unexpended allowance

remaining, request a modification to decrease the allowance to equal the amount that has been used.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION

01 21 15 – LIST OF ALLOWANCES


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 LIST OF ALLOWANCES

The following list of allowances is in addition to any quantity allowances specified as Unit Price Items.

Allowance No. One: Include the following unit cost allowances for carpet materials including taxes. Allowance is for purchase of carpet tiles only. All installation labor and materials, freight F.O.B. jobsite and handling charges are in the bid and not the allowance. Carpet: $30.00 per square yard

Allowance No. Two: Include the following unit cost allowances for LVT material including taxes. Allowance is for purchase of LVT tiles only. All installation labor and materials, freight F.O.B. jobsite and handling charges are in the bid and not the allowance. LVT Tiles: $4.00 per square foot.

Allowance No. Three: Include a lump sum of $1,500.00 for the fabrication and installation of a two-sided project sign to be erected for the duration of construction. The architect shall furnish design of the signs.

Allowance No. Four: Include the lump sum of $4,000.00 for fabrication and installation of exterior signage to be designed by the architect.

Allowance No Five: Include the lump sum of $4,000.00 for the fabrication and installation of interior signage.



END OF SECTION

01 25 13 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

TN Higher Education – Standard Document – October 2018 Page 1 of 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBSTITUTIONS:

A. Contractor assumes all risks associated with premature ordering and installation of substitute products.

B. The specifically named manufacturers, products, and systems, and descriptive characteristics used in the Contract Documents normally serve only to establish a level of quality and a performance standard. Unless a specific restriction is placed upon an item in the specifications, Contractor may submit proposals for substitutions. The Owner reserves the right to disallow substitutions.

C. Delays caused by tardiness of Contractor in preparing and forwarding submittals do not constitute an acceptable basis for consideration of substitute products. Delays due to factors which were in effect prior to project bidding do not constitute an acceptable basis for consideration of substitute products.

D. Decisions heretofore made concerning the equivalence or equality of materials, supplies and equipment furnished for or incorporated in other projects, completed or under construction for the Owner shall not be considered as precedents or criteria and shall have no bearing or influence on the question of equivalent, equal or comparable materials, supplies and equipment for the Work.

1.02 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM:

A. Requests for substitutions shall be submitted to Designer on the form exhibited as Section 01 25 33, or in a similar format which provides the same or more information.

B. When making requests for substitutions, Contractor assumes the following responsibilities:

1. To have investigated the proposed substitute product and determined it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified;

2. To provide the same warranty for substitute that Contractor would for that specified;

3. To provide complete cost data, and waive all claims for additional costs related to substitution which subsequently become apparent; and

4. To coordinate installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for Work to be complete in all respects.



END OF SECTION

01 25 33 – PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM


To: <<Designer name>> Project: <<Project name>>

Attention: <<Designer contact>> SBC Number: <<Number>>

Specified Item Name and Manufacturer:

<<Item name and manufacturer>>

Proposed Substitute Item Name and Manufacturer:

<<Item name and manufacturer>>

1. The following are attached (mark all that apply):

Complete Description Catalog

Laboratory Tests Specifications Data

2. This substitution will have the following effects on dimensions, gauges, weights, etc.:

<<Comments>>

3. This substitution will have the following effects on wiring, piping, ductwork, etc.:

<<Comments>>

4. This substitution will have the following effects on other trades:

<<Comments>>

5. This substitution will have the following effect on construction schedules:

<<Comments>>

6. The proposed substitute(s) differs from the specified product(s) in quality and performance as follows:

<<Comments>>

7. Manufacturer guarantees for the substitute(s) and the specified product(s) are (check one):

The Same Different (if different, explain below)

<<Comments>>

01 25 33 – PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM


8. Information on the availability of maintenance services and replacement materials for proposed substitute(s) is provided on an attached sheet.

Attached Not Applicable

9. Names, addresses, and phone numbers of fabricators and suppliers for proposed substitute(s) are provided on an attached sheet.

Attached Not Applicable

10. If the proposed substitution is accepted, it will result in:

No Cost Impact

A Cost Decrease of $<<Amount>>

A Cost Increase of $<<Amount>> As Shown on Attached Itemization

11. License fees or royalties are pending on the proposed substitute.

No Yes (if yes, explain below)

<<Comments>>

12. The undersigned shall pay for additional studies, investigations, submittals, redesign, and analysis by the Designer necessitated by this substitution request.

Substitutions must be requested in accordance with applicable Contract requirements. After bidding, substitutions are to be submitted only by Contractor. Substitute products should not be ordered or installed without written acceptance.

Submitted By:

Signature: Date: <<Date>>

Printed Name: <<Name>> Firm Name: <<Name>>

13. Designer Review and Comments:

Accepted Rejected

Accepted as Noted Rejected (received too late)

Rejected (submitted incomplete)

<<Comments>>

Signature: Date:

Printed Name: Firm Name:

14. Owner Review:

Signature: Date:

END OF SECTION

01 26 00 – CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION FOR PROPOSALS OR CLAIMS

A. Propose related changes to Work, Contract Sum, and Contract Time, in writing together. Propose unrelated changes separately. Attach and reference pertinent documents related to the change.

B. For a change in the Work, specifically describe proposed change, or briefly describe the proposed change with specific reference to a completely descriptive attachment, such as a request for proposal from the Designer.

C. For a change in Contract Sum, state briefly the reason for change, state the amount, and provide itemization of values on the following forms or similar forms providing the same information:

1. Section 01 26 54 Form for Price Summary, listing the itemizations of Work by subcontractors and the Contractor that together apply to an entire related change in work.

2. Section 01 26 55 Form for Price of Work, detailing the quantities, units, costs, and extensions for materials, equipment, and labor, subtotaled, plus overhead, and profit related to a specific proposed change in the Work.

3. Section 01 26 56 Form for Price of Time, if applicable, deriving an average cost per day.

D. For a change in Contract Time:

1. Fully describe the extent of and reasons for the change and effect of the change on the construction schedule, and attach a revised construction schedule. Take into account weekends, holidays, and the specified standard baseline for weather delays during the period of the requested extension.

2. For a change based on weather-related delay refer to Section 01 26 20.

1.02 SIGNATURES FOR CHANGE ORDER

Form shall be similar in format and content to Section 01 26 40 and signed by authorized representatives of the Owner, Designer, and Contractor according to the following procedure:

1. Designer prepares and submits supporting documents to Owner.

2. Owner produces and signs three (3) counterparts of form. Owner scans and transmits an informational copy to its construction representative, Designer, and Contractor.

3. Owner’s construction representative brings owner’s three original, signed counterparts to next progress meeting, unless urgency and opportunity make for a more timely execution.

4. Designer and Contractor both sign all three (3) counterparts at progress meeting. Each retains a counterpart, and the Owner’s construction representative retains the third for the Owner.



END OF SECTION

01 26 20 – WEATHER DELAYS

TN Higher Education – Standard Document – December 2018 Page 1 of 2

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 EXTENSION OF CONTRACT TIME

If a Claim is made for an extension of time based upon weather delays in accordance with the General Conditions an extension may be granted only for the number of weather delay days in excess of the number of days listed for the applicable month on the standard baseline.

1.02 STANDARD BASELINE FOR ADVERSE WEATHER

A. The standard baseline is defined as the number of calendar days for each month during which construction activity exposed to weather conditions is expected to be prevented and suspended by cause of adverse weather. Suspension of construction activity for the number of days each month as listed in the standard baseline is included in the Work and is not eligible for extension of Contract Time.

B. The Owner has established a standard baseline for the State of Tennessee as follows:

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec

12 11 8 7 7 6 7 5 4 5 6 11

1.03 ADVERSE WEATHER AND WEATHER DELAY DAYS

A. Adverse weather is defined as the occurrence of one or more of the following conditions within a 24 hour day that prevents construction activity exposed to weather conditions or access to the site:

1. Precipitation (rain, snow, or ice) in excess of one-tenth inch liquid measure.

2. Temperatures that do not rise above the minimum required for the day’s construction activity, if such temperature requirement is specified or accepted as standard industry practice.

3. Sustained wind speed in excess of the maximum for the day’s construction activity, if such sustained wind speed maximum is specified or accepted as standard industry practice.

4. Dry out days under the following conditions:

a. more precipitation days occur than listed in the standard baseline;

b. there is a hindrance to site access or sitework and Contractor has taken all reasonable accommodations to avoid such hindrance; and,

c. no more than one dry out day is allocated for each additional day of precipitation more than the standard baseline that total one inch or more, liquid measure, unless specifically recommended by the Designer.

B. A weather delay day may be counted if adverse weather prevents work on the project for 50% or more of the contractor’s scheduled work day and critical path construction activities were included in the day’s schedule, including a weekend day or holiday if Contractor has scheduled construction activities that day.

01 26 20 – WEATHER DELAYS

TN Higher Education – Standard Document – December 2018 Page 2 of 2

1.04 DOCUMENTATION AND SUBMITTALS

A. Weather Delay Report:

1. Use a copy of Section 01 26 25 as a weather delay report, indicating for each calendar month the days on which construction activity affecting the critical path of the Work was prevented by weather conditions.

2. In the column for the cause, indicate measurement of precipitation, temperature, wind, or other influencing factors.

3. Describe the construction activity that was scheduled, on the critical path, and delayed.

4. At the end of the month, add up the number of days delay, subtract the baseline number given in this Section, and show the resulting claimable days in excess of baseline.

5. Submit a copy of the completed report with the next application for payment. Reports submitted with applications for payment do not constitute a claim or preliminary claim for extension of time.

B. Claim for a time extension based on weather delay(s):

1. Submit a copy of all reports completed since the last month for which a time extension was previously claimed, or the commencement of Work if no previous claim, through the last month for which delay is being claimed. Claims for time extension based upon weather delays are unjustified if a submitted report does not corroborate the claim or if no report was submitted when it was required with an application for payment.

2. Submit daily jobsite work logs showing which and to what extent critical path construction activities have been affected by weather on a monthly basis.

3. Submit actual weather data to support claim for time extension obtained from nearest NOAA weather station or other independently verified source approved by Designer at beginning of project.

4. Organize claim documentation to facilitate evaluation on a basis of calendar month periods and the standard baseline.

5. Submit in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.



END OF SECTION

01 26 25 – WEATHER DELAY REPORT


SBC Project Number and Project Name:Month and Year Reported Below:

DateWeather condition causing delay

Work scheduled on critical path for this day that was delayed.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

Total number of days this month with delay due to weather

Baseline number from Section 01 26 20

Total – Baseline = claimable days

END OF SECTION

01 26 40 – FORM FOR AMENDMENT, CHANGE ORDER, OR DIRECTIVE


[ ] Amendment PROJECT:

[ ] Change Order Project Number:

[ ] Construction Change Directive Modification Number:

Original Contract Date: Date This Change Initiated:

The following changes in the Contract are hereby directed:

Item Reference Work Contract Sum

Contract Time

The original Contract Sum ............................................................................................. $

Net Change previously authorized ................................................................................. $

The Contract Sum prior to this Modification................................................................... $

This modification ( increases / does not change / decreases ) the Contract Sum... $

The new Contract Sum, including this modification ....................................................... $

This Modification ( increases / does not change / decreases ) the Contract Time..

The new Contract Time, including this Modification.......................................................

The last day of the Contract Time, including this Modification.......................................

CONTRACTOR DESIGNER OWNERSigned Signed Signed

Name&Date

Name&Date

Name&Date

For For For

01 26 54 - FORM FOR PRICE SUMMARY

SBC Project Number:

Name of General Contractor:

Proposal Number: Page of pages

Subtotal:

General Contractor mark-up on Subtotal: % =

Subtotal for General Contractor for work by subcontractors:

Subtotal (including Subcontractors and the General Contractor):

Bond Premium: % =

Total:

This spreadsheet is available on the Owner's Designers' Manual website.

Costs and Allowances

Project Name:

Work by Subcontractors Name of Subcontractor

Date Itemized:

0.00

Work by General Contractor

0.00

0.00Rounding off is permitted if rounding up for decreases and rounding down for increases. Math functions in Excel show rounded to nearest penny, but carry exact value for calculations. Let embedded math do its work.

0.00

Cells with red underline (if viewed in color) are for you to fill in. Others are protected.

0.00

0.00

TN Higher Education - Standard Document - May 2018 Page 1of 1

01 26 55 - FORM FOR PRICE OF WORK

SBC Project Number:

Work itemized below provided by:


DescriptionQuantity Unit Cost Extension Quantity Unit Cost Extension Quantity Unit Cost Extension

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

0.00 0.00 0.00

Materials Subtotal 0.00 Equipment Labor Subtotal 0.00

0.00 0.00

Cost: 0.00 Cost: 0.00 Cost: 0.00

Subtotal of Costs of Materials + Equipment + Labor = $

10% Overhead allowed on costs = $

Subtotal of Costs + Overhead = $

5% Profit allowed on Costs + Overhead = $

Total for this change = $

This spreadsheet is available on the Owner's Designers' Manual website.

0.00

Material

0.00

% Burden =

0.00

Equipment

Cells with red underline (if viewed in color) are for you to fill in. Other cells are protected. Rounding off is permitted

0.00

Project Name:

0.00

% Sales Tax =

Labor

if rounding up for decreases and rounding down for increases. Math functions in Excel show rounded to nearest penny, but carry exact value for calculations.

Date Itemized:

Let embedded math in "extension" columns do its work.


01 26 56 - FORM FOR PRICE OF TIME

SBC Project Number:

Work itemized below provided by:


Description Period Cost Period Cost Per Day(Year, Month, Week, Day)

Superintendent Salary

Superintendent Vehicle

General Use Vehicles

Field Office

Field Office Equipment

Computer

Fax Machine

Copier

Typewriter

Calculator

Field Office Utilities

Electricity

Natural Gas

Water Service

Drinking Water

Telephone Service

On-Site Storage

Shed

Trailer

Safety Program

Cleaning

Site Toilet(s)

Subtotal of Costs:10% for Overhead:

Subtotal with Overhead:5% for Profit:

Total per day:

Cells with red underline (if viewed in color) are for you to fill in. Other cells are protected. Math functions show rounded to penny, but carry exact value for calculations. Let embedded math do its work. Use "Year", "Month", "Week", or "Day" for period. This spreadsheet is available on the Owner's Designers' Manual website.

Week

Day

Project Name:

Date Itemized:

Year

Month


01 29 54 – RETAINAGE ESCROW INITIATION


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 BASIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Reference Tennessee Code Annotated (TCA) § 66-34-104.

B. In accordance with State law retainage shall be deposited into an interest-bearing escrow account if the original Contract Sum is $500,000 or greater.

C. Failure to have the escrow account operational by the time of the Contractor’s second application for payment will result in delay of payment or inability of the Owner to make payment. Any such delay or inability to pay will not be grounds for relief under the prompt payment statutes.

1.01 BANKING INSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS

The banking institution handling the retainage escrow account must be in an appropriate custodial care agreement with the State Treasurer. If not already in such an agreement, a banking institution can request such an agreement from the State Treasurer, subject to meeting eligibility requirements of TCA §12-4-108(c).

1.03 PROCESS

A. Shortly after award of contract, the Tennessee Department of Finance and Administration (F&A) will send the Contractor information for starting the account. This information typically includes the following:

1. Procedural guide

2. Forms including the basic application provided herein as Form A.

3. List of banks that currently have agreements with the State to host retainage escrow accounts.

B. The instructions from F&A will include a name and phone number to call for help if the Contractor needs help completing Form A or if the Contractor plans to use a lending institution that does not have a current agreement with the State for hosting retainage escrow.

C. Immediately upon award of a contract with a Contract Sum of $500,000 or greater, complete the Form A shown in this section, arrange for the completed Form A to be executed by the escrow bank, and instruct the bank to submit the original wet-signature Form A to the following address.

Retainage Escrow CoordinatorTennessee Department of Finance and AdministrationOffice of Business and FinanceSuite 2000 William R. Snodgrass Tennessee Tower312 Rosa L. Parks AvenueNashville TN 37243-0294

01 29 54 – RETAINAGE ESCROW INITIATION


FORM AAPPLICATION FOR THE SUBSTITUTION OF SECURITIES FOR ALL AMOUNTS

RETAINED ON STATE BUILDING COMMISSION CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS

Date:

RE: Contract Number:Project No.:

Location:

Dear State Building Commission:

Pursuant to the provisions of Tennessee Code Annotated, Sections 12-4-108,

Contractor’s name and address as appearing

on construction Contract:

hereby requests that whenever payment for which certain amounts are retained by the State Building Commission as determined by the subject construction contract, the amount so retained be substituted for approved securities, as designated by the Tennessee State Treasurer.

The undersigned Contractor hereby appoints(Name of Banking Institution)

located at to be its(Complete Address of Banking Institution)

agent and attorney-in-fact to receive all amounts retained by the State Building Commission under the provisions of the subject construction Contract and to purchase Retainage Securities ofthe following type:

(Description & Account Number)

The appointed Banking Institution, as indicated by the acceptance signature shown below, agrees to enter or has already entered into a Trust Agreement with the Tennessee State Treasurer to act as custodian and servicing agent of Retainage Securities and to perform all assigned duties and responsibilities with respect thereto as set forth in the Trust Agreement, which is herein incorporated by reference.

Very truly yours,

(Signature of Authorized Representative of Contractor) (Title)

ACCEPTED:

(Signature of Authorized Officer of Banking Institution) (Title)

CONTACT PERSON (BANK)PLEASE PRINT

PHONE NUMBER

END OF SECTION

01 29 73 – SCHEDULE OF VALUES


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 FORM AND APPROVAL

A. The form for the Schedule of Values shall be AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheet.

B. If objected to by the Designer or the Owner revise and resubmit the Schedule of Values to the Designer's and Owner’s satisfaction prior to submitting an Application for Payment.

1.02 LEVEL OF DETAIL

A. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate ongoing evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress measurement and reports.

B. Round off line items to the nearest whole dollar with the total equal to the Contract Sum.

1.03 ALLOCATION OF VALUES

A. Phases:

1. If Phases are stipulated with distinct commencement, duration, or completion requirements, divide the allocation to correspond to the Phases.

2. Within each Phase subdivide the allocations as described below and subtotal.

B. Sitework:

Provide line items for sitework including categories for site utilities, roads and parking, and appurtenances according to general type and physical separation.

C. Each involved building or major structure:

1. Categorize items by major trades or units of work corresponding to the divisions and sections of the specifications.

2. Further subdivide as desired but maintain a distinct and identifiable correspondence to this allocation.

D. If allowances are stipulated in the Work, provide a line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance, including quantity allowances associated with Unit Prices. If the project has phases associate the allowance with the relevant phase.

E. If the Contract is a CM/GC contract based on a Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP) with estimated trades identified as a part of the GMP, provide a distinct line item for each estimated trade.

F. Prior to receipt of written approval of a Change Order, do not show in any respect a Change Order intended to modify the Contract sum, regardless of the Change Order’s status prior to being fully execute. After a Change Order which modifies the Contract Sum is approved and fully executed by the Owner show the Change Order as follows.

1. Provide a single line item for each fully executed Change Order with identification by Change Order number.

2. Maintain these line items through the balance of the project.

G. For the final statement of accounting incorporate Change Orders that modify the Contract Sum into the appropriate allocations.

END OF SECTION

01 29 76 – PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES


PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTAL:

A. In each Application for Payment provide the document indicated in the following tableaccording to its context.

Cou

nter

part

or

Cop

y

Pro

gres

sP

aym

ent

Red

ucin

gR

etai

nage

Upo

nS

ubst

. Com

plet

ion

Fin

alP

aym

ent

Document

§1.

03S

ubse

ctio

n

counterpart YES YES YES G702 Application A

copy YES YES YES G703 Continuation B

copy no no YES Final Accounting C

copy YES YES YES Contingency & Reserve Logs (if CM/GC) D

copy if any if any no Off-Site Stored Materials documents E

counterpart no no YES Affidavit of Payment F

counterpart no YES YES Consent of Surety with Power of Attorney G

copy no no YES Insurance Certificate H

copy no no YES Statement of Continuing Insurability I

copy no if any if any U&O Permit J

copy no YES YES Data Binder Receipt(s) K

copy no no YES Roof Warranty or Warranties L

copy no no YES Report of Subcontractors and Suppliers M

copy YES if any no Visitor Log N

copy YES if any no Weather Delay Report O

B. Provide application documents assembled in order listed above on 8½” x 11” pages, except 11” x 17” pages can be used for Progress Schedules and Submittal Logs if folded to fit an 8½” x 11” size. Orient all pages as shown below. Provide application sets bound with a single clip (no staple) affixed to the upper left of the G702 first page (according to its orientation ).

Bin

ding

Edg

e

8 ½

x 1

1L

and

sca

pe

Bin

ding

Edg

e

8 ½ x 11Portrait

Bin

ding

Edg

e

11 x 17Landscape

Bin

ding

Edg

e

11

x 1

7

Po

rtra

it

C. Counterpart documents shall be original instruments with wet signatures and embossed or wet-stamped seals, in each set of application documents.



D. Provide a draft submission, including attachments, as a PDF attached to an email, to Designer and to the Owner’s construction representative three days prior to actual submittal.

E. Provide actual submission of five sets of the application documents to the Designer at progress meeting, substantial completion inspection meeting, or final inspection meeting. If submitted outside of these meetings, provide conveyance of applicationto Designer, from Designer to Owner’s construction representative, and from Owner’s construction representative to Owner’s central office.

1.02 INCLUSIONS AND CALCULATIONS:

A. Accurately represent all values with two decimal places, calculated to the penny.

B. Stored Materials: Materials suitably stored on-site but not yet incorporated into the Work can be included; and, those suitably stored off-site can be included if documented in accordance with later provisions of this section.

C. On CM/GC contracts, the total completed and stored to date for estimated trades can only be included once bids have been taken, subcontracts awarded, and the actual price reconciled to the Reserve Log.

D. Calculation of retainage and amounts withheld:

1. Credit for completed work and stored materials, and deductions for incomplete work, comprise the Total Completed and Stored to Date. The Total Completed and Stored to Date shall not include the value of punch list items that remain incomplete after Substantial Completion.

2. Retainage is calculated as a percentage of Total Completed and Stored to Date:5% prior to Substantial Completion; 2% after Substantial Completion; then, none at final payment. In the continuation sheets, showing retainage at individual line items is not required and is discouraged, as it promotes rounding errors. Retainage should only be shown at phase sub-totals, if phases exist, and when retainage rates vary between phases.

3. Other amounts withheld (i.e., potential liquidated damages or in response to subcontractor claims of non-payment) can be added to the continuation sheet and deducted from the Total Completed and Stored to Date, or can be deducted from the resulting current payment due after retainage and prior payments are accounted.

E. If a billing period would cross a State fiscal year (ending June 30, starting July 1), provide separate pay requests for the portion of work performed in each fiscal year.

1.03 FORMS, FORMAT, AND CONTENT:

A. G702 Application: Use AIA Document G702 Application and Certificate for Payment

1. For project identification, include the Owner’s project number featured prominently, institution name, and work name, which is normally the project title shown in the Agreement.

2. Provide a unique, sequential application number.

3. Include the Contractor’s address exactly as provided in the ACH Form.

4. Show the county where the Work is located, normally where AIA captions “Contract for”.



B. G703 Continuation: Use AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheet itemized with theline items and values of the schedule of values accepted by Designer, and values and percentages for each line item. If there are phases, include a sub-total for each phase as well as a grand total.

C. Final Accounting: Allocate final Contract Sum as if Modifications had been fully incorporated in Contract Sum at award of Contract, and shall follow the same format as the schedule of values.

D. GMP Contingency Log and Reserve Log, only if a CM/GC contract.

E. Off-Site Stored Materials: If any, provide the following.

1. Statement identifying where materials are stored, and assuring that materials are tagged to identify them for use in the project.

2. Bill(s) of sale for materials claimed that list(s) all items.

3. Certificate of insurance covering materials claimed, recognizing Owner's right to make claims.

F. Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims: Provide counterpart using AIA Document G706, when requesting final payment for the Work or reduction of retainage to zero for any portion of the Work.

G. Consent of Surety:

1. If seeking reduction in retainage prior to final payment for the entire Work, or final payment on only a portion of the Work, provide counterpart using AIA Document G707A Consent of Surety to Reduction in Retainage, or a similarly formed letter.

2. If seeking final payment, provide counterpart using AIA Document G707 Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment, or a similarly formed letter.

3. If Contractor has listed exceptions in the affidavit of payment, Surety's consent shall acknowledge such exceptions.

4. If Contract is not bonded, consent of surety is not required, and Owner will instead advertise a public notice of settlement, and wait 30 days for responses, before accepting the application.

5. Provide counterpart of power of attorney with consent of surety.

H. Insurance Certificate: If seeking final payment, provide certificate of insurance for products and completed operations as required by the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.

I. Statement of continuing insurability: If seeking final payment, a letter written to the effect required by the General Conditions of the Contract.

J. Use & Occupancy Permit (some jurisdictions have a different name): Provide copy with first application following substantial completion.

K. Data Binder Receipt:

1. With first application following substantial completion, provide copy of document identifying to whom Contractor delivered the operating and maintenance data binders.

2. With application for final payment, provide copy of document identifying to whom Contractor delivered project data binders



L. Roof Warranty or Warranties, if any required, on the Owner’s section 07 50 36standard form.

M. Report of Subcontractors and Suppliers, on the standard form.

N. Visitor Log for the period covered by application. After substantial completion, provide log(s) for periods prior to substantial completion that have not been provided in a prior application.

O. Weather Delay Report for all calendar months completed, up to the date of substantial completion, and not previously submitted.

1.04 CERTIFICATION

A. Designer, if in disagreement with the amounts claimed in an application, may either return application to Contractor for revision and resubmittal, or revise application by hand to indicate corrections Designer considers appropriate.

B. Designer, finding an application complete and correct, will certify the application and return one of the sets to Contractor to indicate the action taken.



END OF SECTION

01 31 19 – PROJECT MEETINGS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCHEDULING AND ATTENDANCE

A. The Designer, in cooperation with the Owner and the Contractor, will schedule and administer a pre-construction meeting, periodic progress meetings, and any required special meetings.

B. Representatives of the Owner and the Designer will attend.

C. Attending representatives of the Contractor, subcontractors, and suppliers shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.

D. The Contractor representative shall be authorized to sign Change Orders.

1.02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. A pre-construction meeting will be scheduled upon the award of the contract prior to the issuance of the Notice to Proceed.

B. The Contractor shall arrange for the following participants in the pre-construction meeting:

1. The Contractor’s superintendent and management representative having authority to sign change orders.

2. Major subcontractors’ representatives

3. Major suppliers’ representatives

4. Others as desired

1.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Progress meetings are held to provide a regular and frequent opportunity for the following purposes.

1. Conduct a general review of the progress of the Work aimed at identifying and mitigating impediments to timely completion.

2. Provide an opportunity for the Contractor to submit Applications for Payment along with appropriate attachments and other submittals.

3. Designer and Contractor sign Change Orders in accordance with § 01 26 00.

B. Progress meetings will be scheduled and conducted at the project site when deemed advisable by the Designer until the Work is complete, typically twice monthly.

C. The Contractor shall arrange for the following participants in progress meetings:

1. The Contractor’s superintendent and management representative having authority to sign change orders.

2. Subcontractors’ representatives, as befits the agenda

3. Suppliers’ representatives, as befits the agenda

4. Others, as appropriate.

D. Proceedings of these meetings will be recorded and the Contractor will be furnished copies for its use and for distribution to subcontractors, material suppliers and vendors.

01 31 19 – PROJECT MEETINGS


1.04 SPECIAL MEETINGS

The Contractor and its subcontractors and suppliers shall attend special meetings as deemed necessary and requested by the Designer.



END OF SECTION

01 31 90 – ADMINISTRATIVE LOGS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS LOG

A. If any shop drawings, product data, or sample submittals are required by the Contract Documents, maintain a submittals log to record the status of submittals made to the Designer.

B. Process:

1. Submit three (3) copies with each Application for Payment.

2. Clearly identify the Project.

3. Record activities with respect to shop drawings, product data, samples, and such other submittals which are required by the Contract Documents.

4. Indicate for each submittal made to date:

a. Title or name, and type of submittal.

b. Date submitted to the Designer.

c. Date returned by the Designer.

d. General nature of the Designer's response.

1.02 VISITOR LOG

A. Maintain visitor log in the field office (or with the project superintendent when no field office is required) to record visits by all persons not a part of the Contractor's forces, materials suppliers, or subcontractors' forces, until substantial completion of the entire Work.

B. Process:

1. Submit a copy with each counterpart of each application for payment, covering the period since the last log(s) submitted.

2. Clearly identify the Project.

3. Use the form of specification Section 01 31 93, and indicate:

a. Visitor name and affiliation.

b. Date and time of visit.

c. Length of time on site.



END OF SECTION

01 31 93 – VISITOR LOG


Please print information below if you represent the Owner, institution, Designer or a consultant, a testing agency engaged by the Owner or Designer, a regulatory authority, or yourself as a private individual. Please estimate how long you will be on site, rather than logging out when you leave.

Persons who are employed by the Contractor, a subcontractor, a sub-subcontractor, a supplier, or a testing agency engaged by any of these, are NOT VISITORS, and should not log in on this Log.

Name RepresentingArrival

Date and Time

How Long

On Site

Phone No. While On

Site

01 32 00 – CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION


PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify clearly the Project, SBC Number, and date of issuance or revision on each submitted schedule.

1.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE FORMAT

A. Use a bar chart or critical path schedule format or other method approved by the Designer. A critical path schedule is recommended to enable meeting requirements for documentation for time extension requests.

B. Utilize a construction scheduling software for development and updates.

C. Outline the orderly progress of the Work as planned from the Notice to Proceed through Substantial Completion on the contractually required date.

D. Categorize the Work by major work area and distinct trade or team. If phases are specified also categorize by phase.

E. Divide work activities into one month or less duration.

F. Provide an identifiable relationship to the schedule of values.

G. Identify projected monthly progress, points of 50% completion and Substantial Completion, and other major milestones.

H. If included in the Work, commissioning and storm water pollution protection plan activities shall be major milestones.

I. If planting that is seasonally sensitive is included in the Work, show such distinctly in a seasonally appropriate time.

J. Transmit the schedule in PDF format when requested by the Owner or Designer.

1.03 INITIAL CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

Submit within 21 days of award of the Contract and no later than the date of submission of the first Application for Payment.

1.04 UPDATED CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Submit a copy attached to each counterpart of Applications for Payment.

B. Format in a manner similar to the initial progress schedule and as follows:

1. Indicate the initial construction schedule for the Work.

2. Identify the actual progress through the period covered by the current Application for Payment.

3. Indicate the planned progress through Substantial Completion including extensions of time made by Modification.

4. If actual progress falls behind previous projections, indicate the recovery plan so that the Work will be completed on time.

1.05 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Submit in writing with the initial construction schedule.

B. The submittals schedule may be incorporated into the construction schedule if clearly identified.

01 32 00 – CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION


C. Identify submittals to be made.

D. Show date for submission and date by which Designer should respond, allowing sufficient time for review. Designer may require revision of the submittals scheduleif times allotted for review are insufficient.



END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 32 33 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 1263

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION – 01 32 33 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs or videotapes for existing conditions verification. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Final Completion construction photographs.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation. 2. Division 2 Section "Selective Demolition" for photographic documentation before

selective demolition operations commence. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting digital media as Project Record

Documents at Project closeout.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points or room name and number marked for location and direction of each photograph or videotape. Include same label information as corresponding set of photographs or videotape.

B. Construction Photographs: Submit one print of each photographic view within seven days of taking photographs.

1. Format: 5-by-7-inch prints on single-weight commercial-grade paper, punched for standard 3-ring binder.

2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the following information:

a. Name of Project. b. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera. c. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point. d. Unique sequential identifier.

3. Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files with each submittal of prints as a Project Record Document on CD-ROM. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. Submit images that have same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped.

C. Videotapes (Optional): Submit one copy of each videotape with protective sleeve or case within seven days of recording. Remove safety tab to prevent accidental re-recording.

1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:

a. Name of Project. b. Name of Contractor. c. Date videotape was recorded. d. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point.

Karen

Text Box

SECTION 01 32 33 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 1263

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION – 01 32 33 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Images: Provide images in uncompressed TIFF format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 4.0 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 1600 by 1200 pixels.

B. Videotape Format: Provide high-quality, 1/2-inch, VHS color videotape in full-size cassettes.

1. Tape quality shall be adequate to create photographic prints to be made from individual frames.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location.

B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

1. Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images on CD-ROM in the field office at Project

site, available at all times for reference. Identify images same as for those submitted to Designer.

C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of demolition and starting construction, take color, digital photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points. 1. Note any existing damage to ceilings and other interior finishes under area proposed to

be reroofed as documentation to establish responsibility in the event of construction related damage or unavoidable leaking.

2. Any preexisting damage not so documented may be construed later as to have been caused by ongoing construction activities and subject to repair by the Contractor..

3. Note existing condition of grounds, walks, paving, etc. and any damages to site areas where work will be performed including staging and storing of materials.

4. Video tapes may be used in lieu of photographs if areas are properly identified and subject to approval by the Designer.

D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 4 – 10 digital photographs daily with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.


Karen

Text Box

SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting Coordination

Drawings. 3. Division 1 Section "Progress Schedules and Reports" for submitting schedules and

reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule and construction photographs.

4. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties Project Record Documents and operation and maintenance manuals.

5. Division 1 Section "Close-out Submittals" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

6. Division 1 Section "Close-Out Submittals" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings may be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals by written request and on signing of a waiver form by the submitting party which indemnifies the Architect from any latent errors contained in the processing of CAD files or errors that might otherwise have been detected by procedures that independently developed the information containing the embedded error.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.



C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is required, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

3. Direct Transmittal to Consultant: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted directly to Architect's consultants, provide duplicate copy of transmittal to Architect. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.

4. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 5. Allow 15 days for processing each resubmittal. 6. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit

submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.

E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Unique identifier, including revision number. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Other necessary identification.

F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect.

2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned.



H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review received from sources other than Contractor.

1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal.

2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents.

3. Transmittal Form: Use Contractor’s standard form. 4. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. i. Remarks. j. Signature of transmitter.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit five (5) copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return four (4) copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Initial Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of each submittal where selection of options, color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is required. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

b. Final Submittal: Submit five (5) copies, unless copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit seven (7) copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain one (1) copy; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.



B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. l. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control

wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. 4. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable, translucent, reproducible print and one blue- or black-line print. Architect will return the reproducible print.

b. Initial Submittal: Submit four (4) blue- or black-line prints. Architect will return one print.

c. Final Submittal: Submit five (5) blue- or black-line prints, unless prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit seven (7) prints where prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain one (1) print;



remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned print as a Project Record Drawing.

D. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

E. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:

1. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 2. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 3. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared

from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

4. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name or name of manufacturer. c. Sample source.

5. Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, provide the following:

a. Size limitations. b. Compliance with recognized standards. c. Availability. d. Delivery time.

6. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

a. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product represented by a Sample, submit at least three (3) sets of paired units that show approximate limits of the variations.

b. Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics.

7. Number of Samples for Initial Selection: Submit one (1) full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

8. Number of Samples for Verification: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned.

a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.



9. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

F. Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space.

G. Delegated-Design Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

H. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action.

I. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

J. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

K. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

L. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit three (3) copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."



B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements.

E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.

G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements.

I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements.

J. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements.

K. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

L. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements.

M. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

N. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect.



4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

O. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures".

P. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

Q. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

R. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

S. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

T. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

U. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Owner. If submitted to Architect, Architect will not review this information but will return it with no action taken.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.


01 41 15 – BASIC REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 APPLICABLE CODES, RULES, STANDARDS, REGULATIONS, AND LAWS

A. Comply with all applicable codes, standards, regulations and laws.

B. The following is a list of major codes that may govern the project. It is not to be considered all-inclusive of codes and regulations that may apply and current revisions and editions must be confirmed.

1. Currently adopted codes of the Tennessee Department of Commerce and Insurance, State Fire Marshal’s Office. Refer to the Codes Enforcement section of the Office’s web site for further information which may include, but is not limited to the following.

a. building codes

b. fuel gas codes

c. mechanical codes

d. plumbing codes

e. property maintenance codes

f. fire codes

g. energy conservation codes

h. existing building codes

i. fire protection and life safety codes

2. Current rules of the Tennessee Department of Commerce and Insurance, Division of Fire Prevention. Refer to the Division’s web site for further information which may include, but is not limited to the following.

a. electrical installation rules

b. equitable restroom rules

c. construction plans and specifications review rules

3. Current rules of the Tennessee Department of Labor and Workforce Development, Board of Boiler Rules. Refer to the Board’s web site for further information.

4. Current rules of the Tennessee Department of Labor and Workforce Development, Elevator & Amusement Device Safety Board. Refer to the Board’s web site for further information.

5. The Tennessee Public Building Accessibility Act, Tennessee Code Annotated (TCA) § 68-120-204 with comments as follows. Reference the web site of the Tennessee Department of Commerce and Insurance, Division of Fire Protection.

a. ADA Title II, State and local government facilities must follow the requirements of the 2010 standards, including both the Title II regulations at 28 CFR 35.151 and the 2004 ADAAG at 36 CFR part 1191, appendices B and D. In the few places where requirements between the two differ, the requirements of 28 CFR 35.151 prevail. The compliance date is March 15,

01 41 15 – BASIC REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS


2012, for all newly constructed or altered State and local government facilities permitted after this date.

b. ADA Title III, Public accommodations and commercial facilities must follow the requirements of the 2010 standards, including both the Title III regulations at 28 CFR part 36, subpart D: and the 2004 ADAAG at 36 CFR part1191, appendices B and D. In the few places where requirements between the two differ, the requirements of 28 CFR part 36, subpart D prevail. The compliance date is March 15, 2012, for all newly constructed or altered facilities permitted after this date.

c. Reference:

U.S. Department of JusticeCivil Rights Division, Disability Rights Section-NYA950 Pennsylvania Ave, NWWashington, DC 20530(202) 514-4609

6. The Tennessee Water Quality Act of 1977, TCA § 69-3-101. For further information refer to the web site of the Tennessee Department of Environment and Conservation, Division of Water Resources.

7. ASHRAE Standards:

a. 62.1-2013, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality

b. 90.1-2010, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. A COMCHECK compliance certificate for envelope, interior lighting, exterior lighting, and mechanical must be submitted with thedesigners seal affixed to it.



END OF SECTION

01 45 29 – TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 TESTING REQUIRED BY SECTIONS 1704 AND 1705 OF THE INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE

For the types of work listed under Sections 1704 and 1705 of the International Building Code, the Owner and Designer shall make arrangements for the employment andpayment of services of approved agencies to perform inspections and tests.

1.02 TESTING OTHER THAN THAT REQUIRED BY SECTIONS 1704 AND 1705 OF THEINTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE

A. For the types of work not listed under Sections 1704 and 1705 of the International Building Code the Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory, approved by the Designer, to perform specified services and testing. Employment of laboratory does not relieve Contractor's obligations to perform the Work.

B. Coordinate and pay for inspections and testing required by law, ordinance, rules, regulations, orders, or approvals of public authorities as required by the Contract Documents. Furnish copies of products test reports as required.

C. Furnish incidental labor and facilities to facilitate inspections and tests and for storage and curing of test samples.

D. Notify the lab sufficiently before operations to allow for laboratory personnel assignment and tests scheduling.

E. Make arrangements with lab and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's convenience.

F. Contractor employed testing laboratory qualifications.

1. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E329-18 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection.

2. Be authorized to operate in the State of Tennessee.

G. Contractor employed testing laboratory duties and limitations of authority:

1. Perform specified inspections, sampling, materials testing and methods of construction testing and promptly submit an electronic copy of the written report of each test and inspection to the Designer.

2. Laboratory is not authorized to release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of the Contract Documents, approve or accept portions of the Work, or perform duties of the Contractor.

END OF SECTION

01 50 00 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

Provide structurally sound and neat temporary facilities and controls as necessary for the Work. Remove promptly as each is no longer required.

1.02 TEMPORARY OFFICE

Provide a temporary field office sized as necessary to support the Work. Adequate space and facilities shall be provided in the field office for convenient use and storage of contract drawings and specifications, approved shop drawings and field records. A telephone will be required.

1.03 TEMPORARY SHEDS

Provide watertight and secure storage sheds as necessary to hold materials to be protected while stored on the site.

1.04 TEMPORARY TOILET FACILITIES

Provide adequate temporary toilet and hand washing facilities for the use of all workers, conforming to all applicable laws, ordinances and regulations. Maintain these facilities in sanitary condition and remove upon completion of work.

1.05 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES

A. Provide temporary weather tight enclosures or coverings for exterior openings in the building when required to permit the use of temporary heat or to protect the finished work from damage by the elements, and when necessary for security.

B. Provide temporary dust-tight partitions of plywood construction between the interior of new and existing buildings when work has progressed to the point where a new building is to be connected to an existing building, and in other locations as required by renovation work.

1.06 PROTECTION AND USE OF SITE

A. Maintain any existing site fencing. Provide and maintain all other fencing, planking, bridges, bracing, shoring, sheet piling, lights, barricades, warning signs and guards as necessary for the protection of persons, streets, sidewalks, landscaping, bridges, piers, buildings and property, both on and off the site, from construction related damage.

B. The Contractor shall confine site operations to areas designated for its use on the Drawings. The Contractor shall not interfere with the operations of surrounding buildings and shall not unreasonably clutter the site with materials or equipment.

C. Should any damage occur, Contractor shall restore such to its original condition in a manner acceptable to the Designer.

D. Take adequate precautions against fire. Keep flammable material at an absolute minimum, ensure that such material is properly handled and stored. Except as otherwise provided herein, do not permit fires to be built or open salamanders to be used in any part of the work.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining site access and paying all highway fees.

01 50 00 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS


F. The Contractor shall be responsible for repair of any damage resulting from the performance of the Work to lawns, pavement, sidewalks, curbs, streets, public utilities, and other public property. Repairs shall restore to the conditions existing prior to performance of the Work.

1.07 WATER AND SNOW CONTROL

A. Keep the site and the project free of accumulation of water and supply, maintain and operate all necessary pumping and bailing equipment.

B. Remove snow and ice as necessary for the protection and prosecution of the work, and protect the work against weather damage.

1.08 TEMPORARY HEATING

A. Provide heat, fuel and services as necessary to protect all work and materials against injury from dampness and cold until final acceptance of all work and material in the contract. The Contractor shall provide heat as follows:

1. At all times during the placing, setting and curing of concrete, provide sufficient heat to ensure the heating of the space involved to not less than 50 degrees F unless otherwise approved.

2. For a period of ten days and until final acceptance of the Work or until full occupancy, provide sufficient heat to maintain a temperature of not less than 60 degrees F.

B. Provide temporary heat by approved heating apparatus that will not endanger or damage work in place. Do not use unvented open flame heaters to heat or dry out freshly-placed concrete or plaster.

C. In remodeled areas where the existing heating system remains intact and functioning, replace all disposable filters, clean all permanent filters and clean any duct systems from accumulation of dust and dirt.

1.09 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC AND CIRCULATION

Maintain circulation of traffic, both pedestrian and vehicular, and access to all parts of the site by fire-fighting apparatus during construction.

1.10 VERMIN CONTROL

During construction, the Contractor shall keep the building and the area of the construction free of food scraps and similar organic matter that would attract vermin, and it shall take measures necessary to prevent infestation of the building. If, at the time of final inspection or within six months after occupancy, the building is found to be infested by rodents or other vermin, the Contractor shall bear the expense of extermination.



END OF SECTION

01 60 00 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 ENVIRONMENTAL, HAZARDOUS PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, OR WASTES

A. Do not incorporate in the Work hazardous materials or products as currently defined in the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976 (RCRA), the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act of 1980 (CERCLA), or Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) regulations, rules, or requirements, as amended, and/or State and local regulations, rules, or requirements that are equivalent or more stringent than the Federal regulations, rules, or requirements unless the Contract Documents give no other option than to provide a material or product that contains a hazardous material, component, constituent, waste, or leachate. In studying the Contract Documents and carrying out the Work, report at once to the Designer the discovery of a product or material that contains or is suspected to contain hazardous materials, components, constituents, waste, or leachate.

B. Do not incorporate in the Work a product or material that contains concentrations of a constituent, component, or material above the threshold levels which would require adherence to hazardous waste disposal regulations as currently defined, or could cause a release or threat of release of a hazardous substance at a level that would require a remedial response or removal action as currently defined by RCRA, CERCLA, or the EPA.

C. Select materials and products meeting specified requirements that comply with EPA requirements as regards hazardous materials content. In making requests for substitutions, determine that materials and products proposed for substitution comply with RCRA, CERCLA, and EPA requirements, and supply chemical constituent information and/or Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) with the substitution request.

1.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Materials, products and equipment shall be properly containerized, packaged, boxed and protected to prevent damage during transportation and handling.

B. More detailed requirements for transportation and handling are specified under the technical sections.

1.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Provide suitable temporary weather tight storage facilities as may be required for materials that will be damaged by storage in the open.

B. On-site storage space is limited to the site. Acquisition of any additional off-site space is the responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Allocate the available storage areas and coordinate their use by trades. Maintain a current list showing all items and where they are stored.

D. Store and protect materials delivered to the site from damage. Do not use damaged material in the work.

1.04 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

Manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the respective manufacturers, unless otherwise specified.

01 60 00 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


1.05 IDENTIFYING MARKINGS

Nameplates and other identifying markings shall not be affixed on exposed surfaces of manufactured items installed in finished spaces.

1.06 PRODUCT APPROVAL STANDARDS

A. Definitions:

1. The term “product” shall include material, equipment, assembly methods, manufacturer, brand, trade name or other description.

2. References to approved equal, approved substitution, or similar terms meanthat Designer approval is required.

B. Proof of Compliance: Where the specifications require conformance with Federal specification, ASTM designation, ANSI specification or other association standard, the Contractor shall, where requested or specified, submit supporting test data to substantiate compliance.



END OF SECTION

SECTION 01 74 00 – CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT

01 74 00 – CLEANING & WASTE MANAGEMENT - 1

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions and included in Section “Temporary Facilities”.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean

each surface area or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for

Substantial Completion.

a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.

c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces.

d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps.

e. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted, to a smooth even-textured surface.

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced exterminator to make final inspection, and rid the

project of rodents, insects and other pests.

D. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction.

E. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety

standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner’s property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner.

1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have

become the Owner’s property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Applicable)


01 77 70 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 PRE-CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Submit required tabulations when Work reaches seventy-five percent completion; however, regardless of percent completion, submit not later than 30 days prior to the scheduled date on which Substantial Completion is required.

B. Submit tabulations of the following.

1. Equipment and systems for which the specifications require demonstrations or training, indicating relevant specification sections, scheduled time and place for demonstration and training sessions, and intended audience. Adjust schedule if instructed by Designer to do so.

2. Equipment and systems for which operating and maintenance data are required in the Operating and Maintenance Data Binders and related documents are required in the Project Data Binders.

3. Spare parts and extra materials required, indicating the relevant specification sections, and the appropriate party to whom the items are to be delivered.

1.02 REQUEST FOR CLOSEOUT INSPECTION

A. Substantial Completion: When Contractor considers Work substantially complete, Contractor shall submit the following to Designer.

1. Written assertion that Work is Substantially Complete

2. A list of items to be completed or corrected and dates scheduled for completion or correction of each item

3. Certification that orientation and training for facility maintenance personnel is complete or written assertion that such orientation and training will be certified prior to inspection

4. Written assertion that Operating & Maintenance Data Binders are complete and available or will be prior to inspection

5. When a Use and Occupancy Permit applies, a copy of the final approval(s), or written assertion that they will be complete and available prior to inspection

6. A draft of the application for payment corresponding to the Substantial Completion, with written assertion that an application for payment will be ready and submitted at the inspection

7. When there is Commissioning, written assertion that Commissioning requirements have been completed or will be prior to inspection

8. When there is a storm water permit, written statement of the status of final stabilization required under the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for the TDEC Construction General Permit (CGP) Notice of Termination (NOT).

B. Final Inspection: When Contractor considers Work complete, Contractor shall submit the following to Designer.

1. Certification that a qualified person authorized by Contractor has reviewed the Contract Documents and inspected the Work

2. Written assertion that the Work is complete and in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Final Inspection



3. Written assertion that additional materials necessary to augment the Operating & Maintenance Data Binders with instructions for adding these to the Binders, or full replacement Binders, are complete and available or will be prior to inspection

4. Written assertion that Project Data Binders and Construction Record Documents are complete and available or will be prior to inspection

5. An application for final payment

C. Upon receipt of an appropriate request for inspection, Designer will schedule an inspection meeting with Contractor, and Owner's representatives to determine the status of completion.

1.03 RESULTS OF CLOSEOUT INSPECTIONS

A. Should the Designer determine that Work is not complete to the degree asserted by Contractor, Designer will promptly notify Contractor in writing stating the deficiencies. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy deficiencies and make a request for Re-Inspection.

B. Substantial Completion: Designer will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion accompanied by a list of items to be completed or corrected, and will submit Certificate to Contractor and to Owner for signature with an accounting of Liquidated Damages due, when Designer verifies the following.

1. Work is Substantially Complete based on an inspection conducted pursuant to an appropriate request for Closeout inspection

2. Orientation and training for facility maintenance personnel is complete

3. Operating & Maintenance Data Binders are complete and have been delivered to the Owner

C. Final Inspection: Designer will certify that the Work is Complete, and will initiate Final Adjustments, when Designer verifies the following.

1. Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents based on an inspection conducted pursuant to an appropriate request for Closeout inspection

2. Orientation and training for facility maintenance personnel is complete

3. Additional materials necessary to augment the Operating & Maintenance Data Binders with instructions for adding these to the Binders, or full replacement Binders, are complete and have been delivered to the Owner

4. Project Data Binders and Construction Record Documents are complete and have been delivered to the Designer.

1.04 RE-INSPECTION FEES:

If the Work fails a Closeout inspection, and a subsequent inspection is requested and conducted based on Contractor assertion of the same stage of completion, Owner will compensate Designer for performing such re-inspection as additional services, and deduct the amount of such compensation from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification.

1.05 FINAL ADJUSTMENTS

A. When Designer has certified that the Work is complete, Designer will determine whether modification is needed to reflect appropriate adjustments to Contract Sum



which were not previously effected. If such modification is needed, Designer shall assist the Owner in its preparation and deliver it to Contractor, who in the case of a change order, shall sign and return it to Designer.

B. When Designer has certified that the Work and needed modifications to the Contract are complete, and if necessary, Designer will instruct Contractor to submit a revised final application for payment.

1.06 ONE-YEAR CORRECTIVE INSPECTION

A. An inspection will be scheduled and conducted at project site prior to one year from date Substantial Completion was achieved, but as close to the end of that year as is reasonably possible.

B. The inspection will be attended by at least one representative each of Owner, Designer, and Contractor.

C. The inspection will confirm non-conforming items previously identified for correction by the Owner, and whether corrections have been completed or are still outstanding, and is intended to be an opportunity for Contractor to become aware of any outstanding corrections needed.



END OF SECTION

01 78 02 – CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DATA BINDERS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide two complete sets on paper in three ring binders and a complete set in PDF format. Identify project and type of data on face and saddle. If multiple binders are required, identify as consecutively numbered volumes, identifying original documents as set number one.

B. Provide information required by Contract Documents organized as outlined below. Include related documents under the heading to which each is most closely related.

C. Provide introductory information:

1. Cover sheet giving complete project title and number, Contractor's name, address, phone number, superintendent's name, and related information.

2. Table of Contents identifying material in Binder, and identifying missing materials to be added later or certifying completeness of Binder. Reference and bind separately any over-size documents that cannot be neatly folded and included in this binder.

1.02 OPERATING & MAINTENANCE DATA BINDERS

A. Provide Product Data as outlined below

1. Detailed Table of Contents for this part

2. For each system or product: names, addresses, and telephone numbers of supplier, installer, and maintenance service company; drawing and specification reference; building location; manufacturer and model number

3. Description of unit and component parts, clearly identifying the specific product or part installed. When manufacturer's cut sheets are used for product identification, plainly mark specific items included in Work and mark out items not included in Work.

4. Related information required by Contract Documents, or furnished with items included in Project, that Owner may use for maintenance, operation, repair, renovation, or additions to Work.

B. Provide Operating and Maintenance Data as outlined below for mechanical and electrical systems, equipment, and products:


2. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions supplemented with drawings and text to clearly illustrate proper operation and a logical sequence of maintenance procedures.

3. Servicing and lubrication schedule with list of lubricants.

4. Manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance.

5. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.

6. Installers' coordination drawings with as-installed color coded piping diagrams and wiring diagrams.

7. Charts of valve tag numbers with the location and function of each valve.



8. Circuit directories of panel boards.

9. Instructions for care, with a list of manufacturer's recommended types of cleaning agents and methods.

10. List materials and parts furnished for the Owner's use.

11. Copy of the list of persons who received demonstration and training.

C. If Commissioning applies, provide a section for the Commissioning functional performance test certifications and data. If separate binders of this information have been submitted already, include a copy of their content in this section. If separate binders of this information have not been submitted already, provide a third copy in a separate binder.

D. If a SWPPP applies, provide a section into which the Designer can add the Storm Water Operation & Maintenance Plan.

1.03 PROJECT DATA BINDERS

A. On the form exhibited as Section 01 78 88, provide required information for general contractor and all subcontractors and major material suppliers.

B. Provide certificates and acceptance information:


2. Certificate of Substantial Completion

3. A copy of the State Fire Marshal’s Certificate of Occupancy, if applicable

4. Other Certificate(s) of Inspection, Use & Occupancy permit, or letter(s) of acceptance from:

a. Local building authorities

b. Department of Labor for boilers, pressure vessels, or elevators

c. Public Health Authorities

d. other governing authorities as apply

C. Guarantees, warranties, bonds, certifications, maintenance agreements, and related documents


2. Guarantees, warranties, and bonds, executed by the respective vendors, manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors

3. Certifications

4. Maintenance Agreements and service contracts

5. Complete information for each item:

a. Product or work item, and scope of installation

b. Name of provider, with name of responsible principal, address and telephone number

c. Beginning date and duration



d. Information about instances which might affect validity, and proper procedure in case of failure

D. If a SWPPP applies, provide the twice-weekly inspection reports and site audit reports.

1.02 CONSTRUCTION RECORD DOCUMENTS

Keep the record copy of Contract Documents required by the Conditions in good condition and in the course of the Work, legibly mark these to record actual conditions of Work, including: location, depth, and identification of new and existing underground items, utilities, valves, tap points, equipment, service access, test points, and related features; field changes in dimensions and detail; changes by addenda or Modification; and, description and details of features for maintenance, service, replacement, or expansion of the Work.



END OF SECTION

01 78 25 – DATA BINDER RECEIPT


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 CONTRACTOR PREPARATION AND USE OF THIS FORM

A. Use this form or a reasonable facsimile to verify delivery of Data Binders. Fill in the identifying information following this paragraph, then use the prepared form as a receipt, for signature by the person to whom Data Binders are delivered. Provide acopy of the receipt with the Application for Payment.

1. For the Application for Payment commensurate with Substantial Completion, provide a copy indicating delivery of Operating and Maintenance Data Binders.

2. For the Application for Payment commensurate with Final Completion, provide a copy indicating delivery of Project Data Binders.

B. Identifying Information:

1. For the Work:

Project Name:

Institution:

Location:

SBC No.:

2. For the Data Binder(s), mark only one of the boxes below:

Only Operating & Maintenance Data Binder(due at substantial completion inspection)

Only Project Data Binder(due at final inspection)

Both Data Binders

1.02 RECIPIENT SIGNATURE

A. By signature below, recipient acknowledges receipt of the Data Binder identified above, but does not certify the completeness or correctness of the Data Binder.

Recipient Signature:

Recipient’s name and title or affiliation with Owner or Designer



END OF SECTION

01 78 88 – REPORT OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS

Submit required reports of subcontractors and suppliers on forms similar to the example herein or on forms with equivalent content and detail.

1.02 EXAMPLE REPORT

REPORT OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS

Project: SBC No. Report Date: General Contractor Diversity-Owned?

If “Yes”, provide classification and certifying agency.

General Contractor Name, Address, Phone, and Principal Contact:

___Yes ___ No

Work of Subcontractor or Major Material

Supplied and Dollar Value

Firm Name and AddressPrincipal Contact and

Phone Number

Diversity-Owned Business?

If “Yes”, provide classification and certifying agency.

___Yes ___ No

___Yes ___ No

___Yes ___ No

___Yes ___ No

___Yes ___ No

___Yes ___ No

___Yes ___ No

___Yes ___ No

___Yes ___ No

___Yes ___ No

Continue report as required on additional pages. Page ___ of ___.

END OF SECTION

01 79 21 – DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING


PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Coordinate a schedule of demonstration and training with Designer and Owner’s personnel for all installed equipment and systems.

B. Conduct demonstration and instruction as soon as practicable upon installations, and prior to Substantial Completion inspection. Substantial Completion shall not be certified, nor shall Owner be required to assume responsibility for operating, maintaining, or insuring system, prior to complete demonstration and instruction.

C. If conditions (such as season of year) do not allow for a complete demonstration or training of equipment and systems operation during one meeting session prior to Substantial Completion; then coordinate a schedule that shall provide a sufficient number of sessions within the warranty period.

D. Demonstrate operation of installed equipment and systems to Designer and to Owner’s representative. All dependent systems must be demonstrated as being operationally coordinated, e.g. energy management controls coordinated with mechanical equipment.

E. Demonstrations shall be complete and detailed; referencing manufacturer’s printed O&M instructions and evidencing all required design specifications.

F. All training shall be specific to the actual installed equipment and systems, and be performed by persons approved by equipment manufacturer(s) and/or approved by the Designer to conduct such training.

G. Instruct Owner’s personnel with overall equipment and systems assembly and function; using assembly drawings and diagrams which are specific to the actual installed equipment and systems.

H. Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and systems; using the manufacturer’s printed operating and maintenance data thatis specific to the installed equipment and systems as the basis of instruction.

I. Verify that Owner’s personnel have received all spare materials and parts required to be furnished, and provide instruction in replacement procedures.

J. Make lists of persons witnessing equipment and systems demonstration, and persons receiving operating instruction, using a format similar to the form included in section 01 79 25 with project, subject, trainer, session information, and attendees identified. Include copy of lists in the Operating and Maintenance Data Binders.



END OF SECTION

01 79 25 – DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VERIFICATION


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 INSTRUCTIONS

A. Use a copy of this page as a planning form for demonstrations and training. Fill in the basic identifying information below:

SBC Project Number:

Required date of Substantial

Institution/Location:

Project Name:

Owner’s Facility Coordinator: Phone:

Owner’s Maintenance Contact:

Phone:

Contractor Contact: Phone:

B. If a list of required demonstrations and training has been specified in Division 1, use that list as a starting point, review the project manual for other specifications that require training of the Owner’s operators, and complete the list below. Check thebox on left if Demonstration and Training is required on the standard listed subjects; add subjects as identified by review of the specifications and check the box to the left of each; and, schedule and indicate a target date for each. If the number of training subjects exceeds the available space provided here, replace or continue the list on a similarly formatted separate page. Submit the list with the initial Progress Schedule, and update as necessary during the Work to ensure that advance notice of the demonstration and training schedule is acceptable to the Designer.

Spec Reference Subject Target Date Actual Date

Accessibility

Boiler

Chiller

Controls

Data Transmission

Electrical

Elevator / Conveying

Fire Alarm

Irrigation

Mechanical

Plumbing

Telecommunications

01 79 25 – DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VERIFICATION


1.02 TRAINING VERIFICATION REPORT

For each session conducted, use this page as a training verification report. Fill in the information below prior to the session. “End Time” may be filled in after.

SBC Project Number:

Institution/Location:

Project Name:

Subject Equipment / System:

Spec Reference

Demonstration Trainer Name: Company: Phone:

and Training(by whom, Place: Date: Start Time: End Time:

where, when)

A. Minimum Agenda Requirements:

System Walk-through Operation Trouble-shooting

Maintenance Safety

B. Attendance: Each person receiving the demonstration and training shall sign in below, or on a similarly formatted continuation page:

Initials Legibly print your name Unit and title or function

END OF SECTION

State of Tennessee High Performance Building Requirements: Section 01 81 14 1 | P a g e

SECTION 01 81 14 HIGH PERFORMANCE BUILDING REQUIREMENTS (HPBr)

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The State of Tennessee High Performance Building Requirements (HPBr) is an

Office of the State Architect (OSA) program acknowledged by the State Building

Commission (SBC) whose goal is to provide a minimum standard of high

performance building attributes for Designers and Contractors. It is to be used as a

mandatory design, construction, and operations tool for all SBC projects including

new construction, additions, and renovation / maintenance.

B. The Designer and Owner have selected materials and utilized integrated design

processes that achieve the State of Tennessee’s objectives for high performance

buildings. The Contractor is responsible for maintaining and supporting these

objectives in developing means and methods for performing work and in proposing

product substitutions or changes to specified processes.

C. A copy of the Checklist/Tracking Form worksheet is found as an attachment to this

section which summarizes the HPBr credits intended to be achieved.

D. The Contractor shall review the project-specific Checklist/Tracking Form worksheet

for those credits for which the Contractor has a responsibility in achieving. The

Contractor shall respond to the Designer and the Owner regarding credits that are

the responsibility of the Contractor, that depend on product selection or product

qualities, or that depend on Contractor’s procedures. Contractor shall document

responses as informational submittals. Contractor shall inform Designer and/or

Owner where credit applicability is questionable or where pursued credits may not be

achieved. The Contractor shall also inform the Designer and Owner of credits which

are achievable but are not shown as being pursued in the checklist.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Addition – an increase in floor area of a building outside of the existing building

envelope.

B. Adhesive - A substance used to bond two surfaces together by attachment.

Adhesives include all bonding and adhesive primers.

C. Brownfield – Property with the potential presence of hazardous substances,

pollutants or contaminants which may complicate redevelopment efforts. See also

www.epa.gov/brownfields.

01 81 14 – TN HIGH PERFORMANCE BUILDING REQUIREMENTS


D. Formaldehyde - Formaldehyde is a naturally occurring volatile organic compound

which is carcinogenic and an irritant when present in relatively high concentrations. It

has been known to cause headaches, dizziness, mental impairment, and other

symptoms. When present in air at levels above 0.1 ppm (parts per million), it may

cause watery eyes, burning sensations in the eyes, nose, and throat; nausea;

coughing; chest tightness; wheezing; skin rashes; as well as asthmatic and allergic

reactions.

E. Indoor Air Quality - The quality of air inside a space or building. Indoor air quality

affects the health and well-being of building occupants.

F. Light Pollution - Waste light from building sites and lighting installations produces

glare, when directed upward or off site.

G. Outdoor Air - The ambient air that enters a building through a ventilation system,

through intentional openings for natural ventilation, or by infiltration.

H. Permanently Installed Building Product - products and materials that create the

building or are permanently attached to it. Examples include structure and enclosure

elements, installed finishes, framing, interior walls, cabinets and casework, doors,

and roofs. Most of these materials and products fall within CSI 2012 MasterFormat

Divisions 3-10, 31, and 32.

I. Recycled Content - Recycled Content of materials is defined according to Federal

Trade Commission Guides for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims (16 CFR

Part 260). Recycled Content value of a material assembly is determined by weight.

Recycled fraction of assembly is multiplied by cost of assembly to determine

Recycled Content value.

1. “Post-Consumer” material is defined as waste material generated by households

or by commercial, industrial, and institutional facilities in their role as end users of

the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose.

2. “Pre-Consumer” material is defined as material diverted from waste stream

during the manufacturing process. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as

rework, regrind, or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed

within the same process that generated it.

J. Regional Materials - Materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as

well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of project site. If only a fraction of a

product or material is extracted or harvested or recovered and manufactured locally,

then only that percentage (by weight) must contribute to regional value.



K. Rapidly Renewable Material - Building materials and products which are made from

plants that are typically harvested within a 10—year or shorter cycle.

L. Salvaged or Reused Materials - Construction materials recovered from existing

buildings or construction sites and reused. Common Salvaged Materials include

structural beams and post, flooring, doors, cabinetry, brick, and decorative items.

M. Sealant - Any adhesive with properties that have been specifically formulated to fill,

seal, or waterproof gaps or joints between two surfaces. These may include primers

and caulks.

N. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) - SRI is the measure of a material’s ability to reject

solar heat. It is defined so that a standard black surface (reflectance 0.05, emittance

0.90) is 0 and a standard white surface (reflectance 0.80, emittance 0.90) is 100.

Once the maximum and minimum temperature rises of a given material have been

computed, the SRI can be found by interpolating between the values for white and

black. Materials with the highest SRI values are the coolest choices. Due to the way

SRI is defined a relative scale, particularly hot materials may have slightly negative

values, and particularly cool materials can sometimes exceed 100. (Lawrence

Berkeley National Laboratory Cool Roofing Materials Database)

O. Urea Formaldehyde - A combination of urea and formaldehyde that is used in some

adhesives and will sometimes emit formaldehyde at room temperature.

P. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) - Chemicals that are emitted as gases from

certain solids or liquids. VOCs include a variety of chemicals, some of which may

have short- and long-term adverse health effects.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Tennessee High Performance Building Requirements (HPBr) can be found within the

Office of the State Architect’s page on the following website (includes the Manual,

HPBr Workbook, Owner’s Project Requirements, FAQ Guide, and Quick Start

Guide): https://www.tn.gov/content/tn/osa/capital---real-estate/capital-projects/high-

performance-building-requirements--hpbr-.html



1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product submittals to be provided with manufacturer documentation in accordance

with Section 01 60 00:

1. EQ5.1 – Air Quality Management: During Construction.

a. If ANSI/SMACNA 008-2008, Chapter 3 approaches are employed, take a

minimum of 18 construction photographs including six photographs taken on

three different occasions during construction along with a brief description of

each approach, documenting implementation of IAQ management measures,

such as protection of ducts and on-site stored or installed absorptive

materials

2. EQ6.1 – Material VOC Limits. Manufacturer’s product data including VOC

content for all adhesives, sealants, paints / coatings, flooring systems, and urea-

formaldehyde content of composite wood / agrifiber materials within the weather

barrier.

B. As requirement for Final Payment, Contractor shall provide additional closeout

submittals as follows:

1. MR2.1 – Construction Waste Management. Waste hauler provided construction

waste receipts, tickets and reports verifying level of diverted waste or salvaged

material for the project.

2. MR3.1 – Sustainable Materials. Materials and Resources Calculator, (found

within the Checklist Workbook) verifying calculated Recycled Content (pre-

consumer and post-consumer), regional content, resource reuse / material reuse,

Rapidly Renewable Materials, and Tennessee-based material content (excluding

MEP equipment).

3. EQ5.1 – Air Quality Management: During construction. Filter change log

showing filters are replaced prior to occupancy

4. Signed Credit Verification Form found within the HPBr Workbook

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. MR2.1 - Construction Waste Management. No less than 50 percent or more waste

material (excluding soil, by weight) from construction has been diverted from the

landfill to be salvaged or recycled.



1. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to

error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors.

2. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much

waste as economically feasible.

2.02 VOC Limit Table

EQ Table – Material VOC Limits

Architectural Adhesives (g/L less water):

a. Indoor Carpet: 50

d. Rubber Floor: 60

f. Ceramic Tile: 65

g. VCT & Asphalt: 50

h. Drywall & Panel: 50

i. Cove Base: 50

Specialty Adhesives (g/L less water):

a. PVC Welding: 510

b. CPVC Welding: 490

c. ABS Welding: 325

d. Plastic Cement: 250

e. Primer for Plastic: 550

f. Contact: 80

g. Special Purpose Contact: 250

Substrate Specific (g/L less water):

a. Metal to Metal: 30

b. Plastic Foams: 50

c. Porous Material (except wood): 50

e. Fiberglass: 80

Sealants (g/L less water):

a. Architectural: 250

b. Architectural Porous: 775

c. Non-membrane Roof: 300

h. Aerosol General Purpose web spray: 55% VOCs by weight

Paints (g/L less water):

a. Flats: 50



b. Non-Flats 50

Anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to interior ferrous metal substrates:

a. VOC limit is (g/L less water): 250

Coatings (g/L less water)

a. Clear wood finish, varnish: 350

c. Floor coatings: 100

d. Sealers and undercoaters: 200

g. Stain: 250

PART 3 – EXECTUION

3.01 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. EQ5.2 Construction Indoor Air Quality Management additional requirements, the

Contractor shall develop and implement an Indoor Air Quality Management plan for

the pre-occupancy phase as follows:

1. Option 2 - Perform air quality testing

a. Conduct baseline indoor-air-quality testing, after construction ends and

furniture has been moved in as well as prior to occupancy, using testing

protocols consistent with the EPA’s “Compendium of Methods for the

Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air,” and as additionally detailed in

the HPBr Manual.

b. Demonstrate that contaminant maximum concentrations listed below are not

exceeded:

i. Formaldehyde: 27 ppb.

ii. Particulates (PM10): 50 micrograms/cu. m.

iii. Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOC): 500 micrograms/cu. m.

iv. 4-Phenylcyclohexene (4-PH): 6.5 micrograms/cu. m.

v. Carbon Monoxide: 9 ppm and no greater than 2 ppm above outdoor

levels.

c. For each sampling point where maximum concentration limits are exceeded,

conduct additional flush-out with outside air and retest the specific

parameter(s) exceeded to indicate the requirements are achieved. Repeat



procedure until requirements have been met. When retesting non-complying

building areas, take samples from same locations as in the first test.

d. Air-sample testing must be conducted as follows:

i. Measurements must be conducted prior to occupancy but during

normal occupied hours, and with building ventilation system starting at

the normal daily start time and operated at minimum outside air flow

rate for occupied mode throughout duration of air testing.

ii. Building must have interior finishes installed including millwork, doors,

paint, carpet, and acoustic tiles. Non-fixed furnishings such as

workstations and partitions are encouraged, but not required, to be in

place for testing.

iii. Number of sampling locations varies depending on size of building

and number of ventilation systems. For each portion of building

served by a separate ventilation system, number of sampling points

must not be less than one per 25,000 sq. ft. (2300 sq. m) or for each

contiguous floor area, whichever is larger, and must include areas

with the least ventilation and greatest presumed source strength.

iv. Air samples must be collected between 3 and 6 feet (0.9 and 1.8 m)

from the floor to represent the breathing zone of occupants, and over

a minimum four-hour period.

3.02 ATTACHMENTS

A. Tennessee HPBr Checklist/Tracking Form

B. Tennessee HPBr Credit Verification Form


High Performance Building Requirements - 5/18/18 Helpful Hints: Project Team Representatives Initials

CHECKLIST / TRACKING FORM 1) Refrain from copying and pasting data in Column C, "Applicable to O - Owner

SBC Number: 373/003-02-2019 Building/Site Scope?" as this can cause errors in some rows. C - ContractorProject Name: APSU Military Family Rescource Center 2) If any cell highlights red below, then you have a point allocated to a ME - Mechanical Engineer

Applicable 30 Date: 1/10/2020 credit that is "not applicable." This is an error. Simply delete the contents EE - Electrical EngineerMinimum 15 Project Type: Renovation/Maintenance of the cell to reset. CE - Civil Engineer

Programming 0 Project Phase: Construction Documentation3) In column C, if you have copied or pasted in this column and a cell A - Architect

SD 0 highlights all red, delete the contents of that cell to correct the error. CxA - Commissioning AgentDD 0 4) If no points are available in the dropdown, this means you have listed LA - Landscape ArchitectCD 19 Compliance Check: Project Complies with the HPBr that credit as "not applicable" and points cannot be attempted. Other - OtherCloseout 0

Checklist Total 0 0 105 0 0 105 0 0 105 19 0 86 0 0 105

22Points

Land Management LM Total: 0 0 22 0 0 22 0 0 22 2 0 20 0 0 22

Possible Points

Credit IDApplicable to Building/Site

Scope?Description Level: Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No

Comment: Describe implementation approach for each pursued credit. New comments should be appended to old comments at each project phase. If credits are neither pursued nor applicable, provide justification.

Role Initials

1 LM1.1 No Site Selection - Reuse Existing Buildings Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 O 0

1 LM1.2 NoSite Selection - Show preference for building on developed sites: Preserve farmland/habitat, wetlands, floodplains, public parkland

Priority 1 1 1 1 1 1 O 0

1 LM1.3 NoSite Selection - Brownfield Redevelopment - Remediate and Restore contaminated sites when possible

Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 O 0

1 LM1.4 NoSite Selection - Urban Development - Locate building within existing infrastructure

Priority 1 1 1 1 1 1 O 0

1 LM2.1 No Site Disturbance - Sediment and Erosion control during construction Required 1 1 1 1 1 C 0

1 LM2.2 NoSite Disturbance - Limit site disturbance during construction to minimum development footprint

Priority 1 1 1 1 1 1 CE 0

1 LM3.1 No Transportation - Plan for access to public transportation Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 O 0

1 LM3.2 NoTransportation - Provide bicycle storage for 5% of building occupants and shower/changing facilities for 0.5% of FTE occupants


1 LM3.3 NoTransportation - Plan site to include preferred parking for carpooling for 5% of all spaces provided


1 LM3.4 NoTransportation - Plan site to include preferred parking for low-emitting/fuel efficient vehicles for 5% of all spaces provided


1 LM4.1 No Landscape Design - Maximize vegetated open space Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 Other 01 LM4.2 No Landscape Design - Native and drought tolerant planting Required 1 1 1 1 1 Other 01 LM5.1 No Heat Island Reduction - Non roof surface reflectivity and shading Priority 1 1 1 1 1 1 CE 01 LM5.2 No Heat Island Reduction - Reflective roof materials Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 A 0

1 LM6.1 NoStormwater Design - Post development discharge rate and volume not to exceed Pre-development rate


2 LM6.2 NoStormwater Design - Reduce discharge rate and volume 25% on previously developed sites.


1 LM6.3 NoStormwater Design - Design to remove 80% Total Suspended solids from the average annual rainfall event. Verify local requirements.


1 LM6.4 No Stormwater Design - Design per TDEC BMP References Required 1 1 1 1 1 CE 0

1 LM7.1 YesExterior Site Lighting - Design exterior lighting power to be 10% less than is allowed by ASHRAE 90.1-2010, Section 9.4.3

Priority 2 1 1 1 1 0 1 EE 0

1 LM7.2Exterior Site Lighting - Locate fixtures to minimize illuminance above the horizontal plane

Priority 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 EE 0

1 LM7.3 YesExterior Site Lighting - Locate exterior fixtures to minimize light trespass at property lines. Document foot-candle levels at site boundary

Priority 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 EE 0

7Points

Water Effciency WE Total: 0 0 7 0 0 7 0 0 7 2 0 5 0 0 7

Possible Points



Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No


Role Initials

1 WE1.1 NoWater Efficient Landscaping, Utilize efficient irrigation technologies and planting measures

Required 1 1 1 1 1 ME 0

1 WE.1.2 No Water Efficient Landscaping, Non potable sources or no irrigation Priority 1 1 1 1 1 1 A 01 WE2.1 No Wastewater Treatment & Conveyance: On site treatment Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 ME 01 WE2.2 No Wastewater Treatment & Conveyance: Utilize non potable water Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 ME 02 WE3.1 Yes Water Use Reduction - Fixture flow and flush rates Required 2 2 2 1 1 2 ME 01 WE3.2 Yes Water Use Reduction - Utilize auto-flow / auto-flush valves Priority 2 1 1 1 1 0 1 ME 0

37 Points

Energy Efficiency EE Total: 0 0 37 0 0 37 0 0 37 4 0 33 0 0 37

Possible Points



Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No


Role Initials

1 EE1.1 Yes Commissioning - Basic commissioning process Required 1 1 1 1 0 1 CxA 03 EE1.2 No Commissioning - Advanced commissioning process Priority 1 3 3 3 3 3 CxA 0

Points Summary

Phase

Programming SD CDDD

Category from Applicability Tree:

Closeout

Primary Credit Responsibility



Print Date: 1/13/2020 2:42 PM State of Tennessee HPBr 2/20/18 Page 1 of 3







Checklist Total 0 0 105 0 0 105 0 0 105 19 0 86 0 0 105

Points Summary

Phase

Programming SD CDDD


Closeout

1 EE2.1 YesEnergy Efficient Purchasing Policy - Energy Star qualified appliances & equipment

Required 1 1 1 1 0 1 O 0

1 EE3.1 NoEnergy Efficiency - Schematic Design energy modeling

Required 1 1 1 1 1 Other 0

1 EE3.2 No Energy Efficiency - Life Cycle Cost Analysis Priority 1 1 1 1 1 1 Other 0

1 EE3.3 YesMinimum Energy Performance - all projects to demonstrate compliance with ASHRAE 90.1-2010, according to project scope

Required 1 1 1 1 0 1 Other 0

8 EE3.4 No

Improved Energy Performance - energy model is used during design, and final design demonstrates energy cost savings that exceed those required by the Minimum Energy Performance credit (EE3.3)

Priority 1 8 8 8 8 8 Other 0

5 EE4.1 Yes Energy Efficiency in Existing Buildings - Lighting Power Reduction Priority 1 5 5 5 1 4 5 EE 02 EE4.2 No Energy Efficiency in Existing Buildings - Daylight Harvesting Controls Priority 1 2 2 2 2 2 EE 02 EE4.3 Yes Energy Efficiency in Existing Buildings - Vacancy sensor-controlled lighting Priority 1 2 2 2 2 2 EE 02 EE4.4 No Energy Efficiency in Existing Buildings - High efficiency HVAC Equipment Priority 1 2 2 2 2 2 ME 01 EE5.1 No Energy Metering, Monitoring and Reporting: Building-Level Metering Priority 1 1 1 1 1 1 ME 0

3 EE5.2 NoEnergy Metering, Monitoring and Reporting: System level energy metering with measurement and verification - New Construction


3 EE5.3 NoEnergy Metering, Monitoring and Reporting: System level energy metering with measurement and verification - Existing Buildings


1 EE6.1 NoLong-Term Energy Reporting - Maintain energy and water consumption data in Energy Star Portfolio Manager

Priority 1 1 1 1 1 1 O 0

1 EE7.1 NoRenewable Energy - Investigate life-cycle cost effectiveness of on-site renewable energy


1 EE7.2 NoRenewable Energy - Provide Renewable Energy Credits (RECs) equal to 10% of annual site electricity through TVA or RECs equal to 35% from another source

Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 O 0

15Points

Materials and Resources MR Total: 0 0 15 0 0 15 0 0 15 2 0 13 0 0 15

Possible Points



Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No


Role Initials

1 MR1.1 No Recycling Collection and Storage Required 1 1 1 1 1 O 03 MR2.1 Yes Construction Waste Management (50%, 75%, 95%) Priority 1 3 3 3 1 2 3 C 01 MR3.1 Yes Sustainable Materials: Recycled content 10% Required 1 1 1 1 0 1 A 01 MR3.2 No Sustainable Materials: Recycled content 20% Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 A 0

3 MR3.3 No

Sustainable Materials: Tennessee Produced Materials (non-wood) - Harvested AND manufactured in state - 10% of total cost. Harvested OR manufactured in TN, 50% of product cost contributes to credit.

Priority 1 3 3 3 3 3 A 0

3 MR3.4 No

Sustainable Materials: Tennessee Produced Wood Products -Wood materials harvested AND manufactured in state - 50% of wood products. When harvested OR manufactured in state, 50% of material cost contributes to credit.

Priority 1 3 3 3 3 3 A 0

1 MR3.5 No Sustainable Materials: Regional materials - 20% Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 A 01 MR3.6 No Sustainable Materials: Material reuse Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 A 01 MR3.7 No Sustainable Materials: Rapidly renewables Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 A 0

19Points

Indoor Environmental Quality EQ Total: 0 0 19 0 0 19 0 0 19 9 0 10 0 0 19

Possible Points



Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No


Role Initials

1 EQ1.1 Yes Tobacco Smoke Control Required 1 1 1 1 0 1 O 01 EQ2.1 Yes Minimum Ventilation: Design to meet ASHRAE 62.1-2007 or 2012 IMC Required 1 1 1 1 0 1 ME 0

1 EQ3.1 NoOutdoor Air Delivery Monitoring: Provide a direct outdoor airflow measurement device

Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 ME 0

1 EQ4.1 No CO2 Monitoring: Provide CO2 monitors in all high occupancy areas Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 ME 01 EQ5.1 Yes Air Quality Management: During construction Priority 1 1 1 1 1 1 C 01 EQ5.2 No Air Quality Management: Before occupancy Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 C 01 EQ6.1 Yes Material VOC Limits: Adhesives and sealants Required 1 1 1 1 0 1 A 01 EQ6.2 Yes Material VOC Limits: Paints Required 1 1 1 1 0 1 A 01 EQ6.3 Yes Material VOC Limits: Coatings and anti-corrosive paints Required 1 1 1 1 0 1 A 01 EQ6.4 Yes Material VOC Limits: Flooring systems Required 1 1 1 1 0 1 A 01 EQ6.5 Yes Material VOC Limits: Composite wood and agrifiber Required 1 1 1 1 0 1 A 01 EQ7.1 No Pollutant Control: Entryway systems Priority 1 1 1 1 1 1 A 0










Checklist Total 0 0 105 0 0 105 0 0 105 19 0 86 0 0 105

Points Summary

Phase

Programming SD CDDD


Closeout

1 EQ7.2 Yes Pollutant Control: Hazardous material storage Required 1 1 1 1 0 1 A 01 EQ7.3 No Pollutant Control: Filtration media Priority 1 1 1 1 1 1 ME 01 EQ8.1 Yes Thermal Comfort: Design to meet ASHRAE Standard 55-2004 Required 1 1 1 1 0 1 ME 01 EQ9.1 No Individual Occupant System Controls: Lighting controls Priority 1 1 1 1 1 1 EE 01 EQ9.2 No Individual Occupant System Controls: Thermal comfort Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 ME 01 EQ10.1 Yes Daylight to Occupied spaces Priority 1 1 1 1 1 1 A 01 EQ11.1 No Views from Occupied spaces Priority 1 1 1 1 1 1 A 0

5Points

Innovation in Design and Construction ID Total: 0 0 5 0 0 5 0 0 5 0 0 5 0 0 5

Possible Points



Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No Yes

Maybe

No


Role Initials

1 ID1.1 No Innovation in Design: Provide Specific Title Priority 1 1 1 1 1 1 Other 01 ID1.2 No Innovation in Design: Provide Specific Title Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 Other 01 ID1.3 No Innovation in Design: Provide Specific Title Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 Other 01 ID1.4 No Innovation in Design: Provide Specific Title Priority 2 1 1 1 1 1 Other 01 ID2.1 No Environmentally Accredited Design Team Priority 1 1 1 1 1 1 Other 0

Checklist Total: 0 0 105 0 0 105 0 0 105 19 0 86 0 0 105



State of Tennessee HPBr - Revised May 18, 2018

Credit Verification FormTN High Performance Building Requirements

Designated Project Team

Member Initials DateOwner: 0

Contractor: 0Mech. Eng.: 0Elec. Eng.: 0Civil Eng.: 0Architect: BAM 1/13/2020

Cx Agent.: 0Landscape: 0

Other: 0**NOTE - use the filter function for easy sorting for responsible credits, be sure to keep 'Sign-Off' and '(Blanks)'

0 Land Management

# Points Credit ID Description Credit Level: Sign-Off

0 LM1.1Site Selection - Reuse Existing Buildings N/A

N/A

0 LM1.2Site Selection - Show preference for building on developed sites: Preserve farmland/habitat, wetlands, floodplains, public parkland

N/AN/A

0 LM1.3Site Selection - Brownfield Redevelopment - Remediate and Restore contaminated sites when possible

N/AN/A

0 LM1.4Site Selection - Urban Development - Locate building within existing infrastructure N/A

N/A

0 LM2.1Site Disturbance - Sediment and Erosion control during construction N/A

N/A

0 LM2.2Site Disturbance - Limit site disturbance during construction to minimum development footprint

N/AN/A

0 LM3.1Transportation - Plan for access to public transportation N/A

N/A

0 LM3.2Transportation - Provide bicycle storage for 5% of building occupants and shower/changing facilities for 0.5% of FTE occupants

N/AN/A

0 LM3.3Transportation - Plan site to include preferred parking for carpooling for 5% of all spaces provided

N/AN/A

0 LM3.4Transportation - Plan site to include preferred parking for low-emitting/fuel efficient vehicles for 5% of all spaces provided

N/AN/A

0 LM4.1Landscape Design - Maximize vegetated open space N/A

N/A

0 LM4.2Landscape Design - Native and drought tolerant planting N/A

N/A

0 LM5.1Heat Island Reduction - Non roof surface reflectivity and shading N/A

N/A

0 LM5.2Heat Island Reduction - Reflective roof materials N/A

N/A

0 LM6.1Stormwater Design - Post development discharge rate and volume not to exceed Pre-development rate

N/AN/A

0 LM6.2Stormwater Design - Reduce discharge rate and volume 25% on previously developed sites.

N/AN/A

0 LM6.3Stormwater Design - Design to remove 80% Total Suspended solids from the average annual rainfall event. Verify local requirements.

N/AN/A

0 LM6.4Stormwater Design - Design per TDEC BMP References N/A

N/A

0 LM7.1Exterior Site Lighting - Design exterior lighting power to be 10% less than is allowed by ASHRAE 90.1-2010, Section 9.4.3

Priority 2N/A

0 LM7.2Exterior Site Lighting - Locate fixtures to minimize illuminance above the horizontal plane

Priority 1N/A

0 LM7.3Exterior Site Lighting - Locate exterior fixtures to minimize light trespass at property lines. Document foot-candle levels at site boundary

Priority 1N/A

0 Water Efficiency

# Points Credit ID Description Credit Level Sign-Off

0 WE1.1Water Efficient Landscaping, Utilize efficient irrigation technologies and planting measures

N/AN/A

0 WE.1.2Water Efficient Landscaping, Non potable sources or no irrigation N/A

N/A

HPBr Points Achieved

19

[sign/type team member name as verification that initialed credits are COMPLETE]Team Member Name

[sign/type team member name as verification that initialed credits are COMPLETE]

In accordance with the State Architect's office, a copy of this form must be submitted at the end of each project phase to the State Project Manager and accompany required Project Closeout documents. Acceptance by the State Project Manager is required upon review of completed Credit Verification Form. The Checklist Workbook, and all worksheets within it, represents the HPBr compliance documentation for a project and must be maintained with the project records and submitted to the Office of the State Architect upon project close-out.

HPBr Points Required

15

[sign/type team member name as verification that initialed credits are COMPLETE][sign/type team member name as verification that initialed credits are COMPLETE][sign/type team member name as verification that initialed credits are COMPLETE]Brad A. Martin, III,

[sign/type team member name as verification that initialed credits are COMPLETE]

[sign/type team member name as verification that initialed credits are COMPLETE][sign/type team member name as verification that initialed credits are COMPLETE]

State of Tennessee HPBr 5/18/18 Page 1 of 3


Credit Verification FormTN High Performance Building Requirements HPBr Points Achieved

19



15

0 WE2.1Wastewater Treatment & Conveyance: On site treatment N/A

N/A

0 WE2.2Wastewater Treatment & Conveyance: Utilize non potable water N/A

N/A

0 WE3.1Water Use Reduction - Fixture flow and flush rates Required

N/A

0 WE3.2Water Use Reduction - Utilize auto-flow / auto-flush valves Priority 2

N/A

0 Energy Efficiency


0 EE1.1Commissioning - Basic commissioning process Required

N/A

0 EE1.2Commissioning - Advanced commissioning process N/A

N/A

0 EE2.1Energy Efficient Purchasing Policy - Energy Star qualified appliances & equipment Required

N/A

0 EE3.1Energy Efficiency - Schematic Design energy modeling N/A

N/A

0 EE3.2Energy Efficiency - Life Cycle Cost Analysis N/A

N/A

0 EE3.3Minimum Energy Performance - all projects to demonstrate compliance with ASHRAE 90.1-2010, according to project scope

RequiredN/A

0 EE3.4Improved Energy Performance - energy model is used during design, and final design demonstrates energy cost savings that exceed those required by the Minimum Energy P f di (EE3 3)

N/AN/A

0 EE4.1Energy Efficiency in Existing Buildings - Lighting Power Reduction Priority 1

N/A

0 EE4.2Energy Efficiency in Existing Buildings - Daylight Harvesting Controls N/A

N/A

0 EE4.3Energy Efficiency in Existing Buildings - Vacancy sensor-controlled lighting Priority 1

N/A

0 EE4.4Energy Efficiency in Existing Buildings - High efficiency HVAC Equipment N/A

N/A

0 EE5.1Energy Metering, Monitoring and Reporting: Building-Level Metering N/A

N/A

0 EE5.2Energy Metering, Monitoring and Reporting: System level energy metering with measurement and verification - New Construction

N/AN/A

0 EE5.3Energy Metering, Monitoring and Reporting: System level energy metering with measurement and verification - Existing Buildings

N/AN/A

0 EE6.1Long-Term Energy Reporting - Maintain energy and water consumption data in Energy Star Portfolio Manager

N/AN/A

0 EE7.1Renewable Energy - Investigate life-cycle cost effectiveness of on-site renewable energy N/A

N/A

0 EE7.2Renewable Energy - Provide Renewable Energy Credits (RECs) equal to 10% of annual site electricity through TVA or RECs equal to 35% from another source

N/AN/A

0 Materials and Resources


0 MR1.1Recycling Collection and Storage N/A

N/A

0 MR2.1Construction Waste Management (50%, 75%, 95%) Priority 1

N/A

0 MR3.1Sustainable Materials: Recycled content 10% Required

N/A

0 MR3.2Sustainable Materials: Recycled content 20% N/A

N/A

0 MR3.3Sustainable Materials: Tennessee Produced Materials (non-wood) - Harvested AND manufactured in state - 10% of total cost. Harvested OR manufactured in TN, 50% of

d ib di

N/AN/A

0 MR3.4Sustainable Materials: Tennessee Produced Wood Products -Wood materiasl harvested AND manufactured in state - 50% of wood products. When harvested OR manufactred in

50% f i l ib di

N/AN/A

0 MR3.5Sustainable Materials: Regional materials - 20% N/A

N/A

0 MR3.6Sustainable Materials: Material reuse N/A

N/A

0 MR3.7Sustainable Materials: Rapidly renewables N/A

N/A



Credit Verification FormTN High Performance Building Requirements HPBr Points Achieved

19



15

0 Indoor Environmental Quality


0 EQ1.1Tobacco Smoke Control Required

N/A

0 EQ2.1Minimum Ventilation: Design to meet ASHRAE 62.1-2007 or 2012 IMC Required

N/A

0 EQ3.1Outdoor Air Delivery Monitoring: Provide a direct outdoor airflow measurement device N/A

N/A

0 EQ4.1CO2 Monitoring: Provide CO2 monitors in all high occupancy areas N/A

N/A

0 EQ5.1Air Quality Management: During construction Priority 1

N/A

0 EQ5.2Air Quality Management: Before occupancy N/A

N/A

0 EQ6.1 Material VOC Limits: Adhesives and sealants Required

N/A

0 EQ6.2 Material VOC Limits: Paints Required

N/A

0 EQ6.3 Material VOC Limits: Coatings and anti-corrosive paints Required

N/A

0 EQ6.4 Material VOC Limits: Flooring systems Required

N/A

0 EQ6.5 Material VOC Limits: Composite wood and agrifiber Required

N/A

0 EQ7.1 Pollutant Control: Entryway systems N/A

N/A

0 EQ7.2 Pollutant Control: Hazardous material storage Required

N/A

0 EQ7.3 Pollutant Control: Filtration media N/A

N/A

0 EQ8.1Thermal Comfort: Design to meet ASHRAE Standard 55-2004 Required

N/A

0 EQ9.1Individual Occupant System Controls: Lighting controls N/A

N/A

0 EQ9.2Individual Occupant System Controls: Thermal comfort N/A

N/A

0 EQ10.1Daylight to Occupied spaces Priority 1

N/A

0 EQ11.1Views from Occupied spaces N/A

N/A

0 Innovation in Design and Construction


0 ID1.1Innovation in Design: Provide Specific Title N/A

N/A


N/A


N/A


N/A

0 ID2.1Environmentally Accredited Design Team N/A

N/A

0 Total HPBr Points Achieved by Project


01 91 13 – COMMISSIONING


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS

Complete the processes of commissioning selected equipment and systems as specified. These should be listed in a companion section following this section. The absence of such a section does not negate the commissioning responsibilities. In the absence of such a section, review the specifications for commissioning requirements and provide a summary list as a submittal to the Designer for approval prior to performing the required commissioning.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Functional Performance Testing: Prepare and submit to the Designer Functional Performance Testing Procedures for approval of equipment and systems. Contractor will use forms provided in this section of the specifications. Testing procedures will be detailed step-by-step and specific to each system. The approved procedures will be used to conduct the Functional Performance Testing. Functional Performance Testing will be completed prior to Substantial Completion.

B. Commissioning Data: Upon completion of the Functional Performance Testing, the Contractor will submit to the Designer the commissioning section of the Operation and Maintenance Binder. The binder will be divided into sections. The binder will contain copies of the manufacturer’s installation and start-up procedures utilized by the installer and/or contractor, completed Functional Performance Testing Procedures and associated forms from Sections 23 08 xx and 26 08 xx, signed Functional Performance Test Certificates, and equipment and maintenance records for equipment and systems operated prior to Owner acceptance.

1.03 ROLES:

A. Designer, using its Consultants will:

1. Review and approve the contractors Functional Performance Testing Procedures.

2. Report on field observations and report deficiencies to the contractor.

3. Observe the Contractor’s Functional Performance Testing.

4. Report on Functional Performance Testing deficiencies, ensure sign off on completion of testing, and perform recheck of deficiencies.

5. Review final Commissioning Data.

B. Contractor:

1. Prepare and provide Functional Performance Testing Procedures for Designer approval.

2. Provide installation and start-up of all equipment and systems as prescribed by the manufacturer’s procedures.

3. Perform and maintain a maintenance and service log for equipment and systems that are being operated prior to Owner acceptance.

4. Provide manpower, supplies, testing instruments, etc. required to perform Functional Performance Testing.



5. Perform, in the presence of the Designer/Consultants and Owner, Functional Performance Testing.

6. Prepare three sets of Commissioning Data for Designer review and approval.

1.04 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED:

A. The following mechanical systems and associated equipment are to be commissioned as specified. These include but are not limited to:

1. Mechanical (HVAC) air and water

2. Associated controls and building automation

3. Domestic hot water

B. The following Electrical systems and associated equipment are to be commissioned as specified. These include but are not limited to:

1. Electrical panel boards.

2. Power circuits.

3. Lighting levels.

4. Generator and/or back-up power sources.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not used)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 COMMISSIONING CONSTRUCTION PHASE:

Complete the following commissioning activities during the construction phase of the project. Submit for review and provide notification of activities.

A. Manufacturer’s system/equipment start-up procedures.

B. Specified manufacturer’s and/or independent testing agency reports.

C. Project schedule that included dates for start-up of equipment and systems, and Functional Performance Testing.

D. Minimum seven day notification of code required testing and specified cleaning of systems.

E. Minimum seven day notification of system and equipment start-up.

F. Control submittal on systems and equipment including drawings, sequences and programming.

G. Prepare detailed Functional Performance Testing Procedures for systems and equipment. Utilize the forms provided in this section of the specifications. Procedures will be detailed, step-by-step, and include description of expected results for verification. Modify test procedures as required by the Designers’ comments. Coordinate and schedule tests so that all parties involved will be present for final testing and acceptance.

H. Correct all deficiencies prior to final acceptance.



I. Prepare a list of all system and equipment warranties specified in the contract documents. Provide the warranty item and the contract document section number. Provide the Designer with an update list throughout the project.

J. Prepare a list of all deliverables specified in the contract documents. Provide the deliverable item and the contract document section number. Provide the Designer with an updated list throughout the project.

K. Prepare a list of all Training and Demonstrations specified in the contract documents. Provide the type of Training and/or Demonstration and the contract document section number. Provide the Designer with an updated list throughout the project.

L. Prepare a list of all tests, reports, services, etc. whether required by codes, independent authorities, or manufacturers as specified in the contract documents. Provide the type of test, report, services, etc. and the contract document section number. In the case that the test is required by state or local codes, update the list as soon as the information is available. Provide the Designer with an updated list throughout the project.

M. Systems and/or equipment will not be used for temporary purposes of any kind until authorized by the Designer in writing to ensure that required maintenance and warranties remain in force. The Contractor will be responsible for maintenance of all systems and equipment until final acceptance and will maintain on site a binder containing schedules of maintenance activities, items checked, repairs or replacements made and documents to verify that the work was performed. The documentation contained in this binder will become part of the commissioning binder.

3.02 COMMISSIONING ACCEPTANCE PHASE:

Complete the following commissioning activities during the acceptance phase of the project. The activities described in this section must be completed prior to Substantial Completion.

A. Perform Functional Performance Tests of mechanical and electrical systems and equipment as specified utilizing the testing procedure prepared by the Contractor and approved by the Designer to verify proper calibration, operation and performance. The Contractor is responsible for providing all manpower, equipment and/or testing instruments required to perform tests. Functional Performance Testing will be performed in the presence of the Designer/Consultant and the Owner. Tests that fail to perform as required will be retested upon correction. If retesting has to be rescheduled, the Contractor will be responsible for any additional charges.

B. All deliverables prescribed in the contract documents will be delivered to the Owner at the location designated by the Owner.

C. Perform all training and demonstrations prescribed in the contract documents.

D. Provide three final commissioning binders to the Designer for review and approval. Ensure that all forms are completely filled out and all testing results documented. If missing or incomplete information and/or data is identified by the Designer, reassemble replacement manuals with complete information prior to project final payment.

END OF SECTION

01 91 23 - PERFORMANCE TESTING IDENTIFICATION FORM

Page of

SBC Number: Date:

Campus/Institution TestsRun By:

Piece of Equipment Tag Number

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

List Each Piece of Equipment Associated with This System and/or Unit by Tag Number

System/Unit Identifier:

Location

Project:

Installer:

TN Higher Education - Standard Document - May 2018 Page 1 of 1

01 91 26 - PERFORMANCE TESTING PROCEDURES FORM

Page of

SBC Number: Date:

Campus/Institution TestsRun By:

Project:

Installer:

Step by Step Detailed Procedure Expected Result Observations

System/Unit Identifier:

Location

TN Higher Education - Standard Document - May 2018 Page 1 of 1

01 91 29 – FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST CERTIFICATION


Project Name: <<Name>>

SBC Number: <<Number>>

Identification of Equipment or System: <<Identification information>>

Location of Equipment or System: <<Location information>>

Manufacturer /Supplier: <<Manufacturer / supplier information>>

This Date: <<Date>>

Functional Performance Test Procedure Number: <<Number>>

Components Included: <<Components information>>

The above systems and components integral to this equipment are complete and have undergone functional performance tests. All functional performance test procedures are complete and have been checked off only by parties having direct knowledge of the event, as indicted below, respective to each responsible contractor. This functional performance test is submitted for approval and is subject to the attached list of outstanding items not completed successfully. Contractor shall submit a deficiency form upon completion of any outstanding or deficient items. None of the outstanding items preclude safe and reliable functional tests being performed.

Check One: Deficiency listing attached; or, No deficiencies found.

All Designer and Contractor punch list items for this system and related equipment have been addressed and corrected prior to functional performance testing.

The functional performance test procedures were reviewed and approved by the installer and applicable subcontractors prior to testing.

CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION OF PERFORMANCE:

I hereby certify that the above described equipment or system, has been energized, operated, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's recommendations for a sufficient period to confirm that operation complies in all respects with the contract requirements.

Signature Printed Name Date Installer: General Contractor: Designer / Consultant:

END OF SECTION

SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Plywood backing panels. 3. Miscellaneous framing, furring and supports as shown on drawings.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork not specified in

this Section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials, both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures when tested according to ASTM D 5516 and ASTM D 5664.

3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project:

1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Metal framing anchors.



1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for

moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-

inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wood Structural Panels:

1. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. 3. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness

indicated. 4. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction

Guide: Residential & Commercial." 5. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and one of the following:

a. Ammoniacal Copper Quat (ACQ). b. Copper Azole (CBA/ CA – B). c. Ammoniacal Copper Zinc Arsenate (ACZA).

B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:



1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with exterior masonry or concrete on grade.

3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Blocking. 3. Cants. 4. Nailers. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber with 15 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species:

1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods; NELMA. 5. Northern species; NLGA. 6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.

2.4 PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 5/8 inch thick.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

2. Where fasteners are used in contact with treated wood other than CCA, use stainless steel type 304 or 316.

B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.



E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Self-tapping stainless steel “tec” screws with wafer heads and reamer wings, length and size as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate [furring,] nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood.

D. Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized standards.

E. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.

F. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.



END OF SECTION 06105

SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Plastic laminate cabinets - Custom shop fabricated. 2. Plastic laminate countertops - For cabinets above. 3. Solid surface counter tops.


1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood furring, framing, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors." 3. Division 6 Section “Manufactured Casework” for factory fabricated cabinets and tops.

C. Reference Manufactured Casework Section for Special Chemical Resistant Tops for Science Labs..

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, framing, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories, and finishing materials and processes.

B. Product Data: For hardboard, medium-density fiberboard, particleboard, plywood, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, thermoset decorative overlay, solid-surfacing material, fire-retardant-treated materials, cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes.

C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap

dispensers, and other items installed in architectural woodwork. 4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification

numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. 5. Apply WIC-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings.



D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated.

1. Plastic laminates. 2. Thermoset decorative overlays.

E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements.

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels certificate indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified.

D. Mockups: Before fabricating and installing interior architectural woodwork, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be fabricated and installed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting interior architectural woodwork

fabrication. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work. 6. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of


E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."




A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Naming Products)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the WIC quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, or medium-density fiberboard complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, with surface of thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.



D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Formica Corporation. b. International Paper; Decorative Products Div. c. Laminart. d. Pioneer Plastics Corp. e. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div. f. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)."

B. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA numbers or items referenced to this standard.

C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 135 170 degrees of opening, self-closing.

D. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.

E. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, 4 inches long, 5/16 inches in diameter 5 inches long, 2-1/2 inches deep, and 5/16 inches in diameter.

F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081 BHMA A156.9, B04102; with shelf brackets, B04112.

G. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013.

H. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball bearings, BHMA A156.9, B05091, and rated for the following loads:

1. Box Drawer Slides: 75 lbf 100 lbf . 2. Pencil Drawer Slides: 45 lbf.

I. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

J. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

K. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 1-1/4-inch 2-inch 1 1/4” size OD, black or grey, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "OG series" by Doug Mockett and Co., Inc.

L. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.



1. Chromium Plated, Satin: BHMA 626 for bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base; match Architect's sample.

M. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Custom grade interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard.

B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.

D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:

1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.

E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete.

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.

F. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.



1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets.

B. Grade: Custom.

C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay.

D. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch .

E. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements:

1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: HGS. 3. Edges: HGS.

F. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative overlay. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative overlay. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative overlay.

G. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. Provide Architect's selections from laminate manufacturer's full range of colors and

finishes in the following categories:

a. Solid colors. b. Wood grains. c. Patterns.

2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative laminate countertops.

B. Grade: Custom.

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.

D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the following categories:

a. Solid colors. b. Wood grains. c. Patterns.



E. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts.

F. Edge Treatment: As indicated.

G. Core Material: Medium-density fiberboard.

H. Core Material at Sinks: medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue, or exterior-grade plywood.

2.7 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for countertops.

B. Grade: Custom.

C. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/4 inch for tops, ¾ inch for aprons, nosings and backsplashes.

D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid-surfacing material complying with the following requirements:

1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes.

E. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

F. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in shop.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation.

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.

B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts.



D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 96 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.

1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base, if finished.

2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16

inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.

1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive.

4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

H. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats were applied in shop.

I. Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of installed standing framing trim and paneling architectural woodwork.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.



C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.


SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION

07210 - BUILDING INSULATION - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed building insulation in the form of blankets and batts.


1. List below only products, construction, and equipment that the reader might expect to find in this Section but are specified elsewhere.

2. Division 7 Section "EPDM-Single-Ply Membrane Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction.

3. Division 9 Sections "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sound insulation installed in metal-framed assemblies specified by reference to this Section.

4. Division 15 Sections "Duct Insulation," "Equipment Insulation," and "Pipe Insulation."

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for insulation products.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation:

a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville Corporation. c. Knauf Fiber Glass. d. Owens Corning.

2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards.

1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.

B. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

C. Faced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C665 for Type III, Class A (blankets with reflective vapor retarder membrane facing with flame spread of 25 or less); foil-scrim-kraft or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on one face, and as follows: 1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of

25 and 50, respectively. 3. Flanged Units: Provide blankets/batts fabricated with facing incorporating 4-inch-wide

flanges along their edges fro attachment to framing members.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.




A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Install glass-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. On unfinished sides of unexposed walls install clips or braces to insure long-term support of insulation.

D. Install rigid fiberglass board insulation in exterior wall furring and framing where indicated on Drawings.

1. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place or by friction fitting.

E. Stuff glass-fiber, loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.

3.4 PROTECTION



A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.


SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS

07920 - JOINT SEALANTS - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section:

B. This Section includes sealants for the following applications:

1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces: a. Joints between metal panels – horizontal and vertical. b. Control and expansion joints in masonry vertical surfaces. c. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. d. Other joints as indicated.

2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and cast stone

where indicated. d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,

windows, and elevator entrances. e. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. f. Expansion joints in tile and concrete floors. g. Other joints as indicated.

C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and

gaskets. 2. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for fire-resistant building joint-sealant systems. 3. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum

board partitions to reduce sound transmission.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.



C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.

E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in joint-sealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Mockups: Before installing joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution:

1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer.

2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

3. When joint substrates are wet.

B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS



A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each type in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.

B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.

C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

2.4 SOLVENT-RELEASE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic-Based Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1311 for each product of this description indicated in the Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3.

B. Acrylic-Based Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Standard: Comply with FS TT-S-00230 for each product of this description indicated in the Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3.

C. Butyl-Rubber-Based Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1085 for each product of this description indicated in the Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3.

D. Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant: For each product of this description indicated in the Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3 provide manufacturer's standard, solvent-release-curing, pigmented, synthetic-rubber sealant complying with AAMA 803.3 and formulated for sealing joints 3/16 inch or smaller in width.



2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description indicated in the Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3.

2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:

1. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin. 2. Type O: Open-cell material. 3. Type B: Bicellular material with a surface skin. 4. Type: Any material indicated above.

C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm

substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.



D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.

E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints.

F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193, where indicated. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193, of recess depth and

at locations indicated.

a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.

3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE



A. Sealants 1. Exterior Building Elements:

a. One-Part, Nonsag Silicone Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and as follows:

1. Uses NT, M, G, A, and O and interior traffic bearing joints in stone, concrete

and tile. 2. Products: Equal to UltraPruf II by GE.

2. Interior Building Elements:

a. Inside jambs and heads of exterior door frames, inside perimeters of windows. Same as exterior sealant.

b. Inside adjacent to painted metal, gypsumboard:

1. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: One-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable, acrylic-emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834.

2. Products:

a. Trademate Paintable by Dow Corning. b. Acrylic Latex 834 by Tremco.

B. Interior Joints Formed By:

1. Countertops and backsplash to wall.

2. Sinks and lavatories to coutertops. 3. Sealant:

a. Dow Corning 786. b. General Electric Sanitary 1700.

C. Joints in tile and concrete: 1. Multi or Single component pourable urethane sealant. a. Vulkem 245


SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Steel doors – Not Used. 2. Steel door frames. 3. Steel transom frames – Not Used. 4. Borrow-Lite frames – Not Used. 5. Fire-rated door and frame assemblies – Not Used. 6. Preparation for security functions and devices.


1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing anchors and grouting frames in masonry construction.

2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in steel frames. 3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weather stripping. 4. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass in glazed openings in doors frames doors and

frames. 5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot-grouting frames installed in

steel-framed gypsum board partitions. 6. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting factory-primed doors and frames.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details. 3. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles. 4. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, accessories, joints, and connections. 7. Coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.

C. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for doors and frames.




A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure. 2. Temperature-Rise Rating: Where indicated, provide doors that have a temperature-rise

rating of 450 deg F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.


A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames.

B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed.

C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Steel Doors and Frames:

a. Amweld Building Products, Inc. b. Benchmark Commercial Doors; a division of General Products Co., Inc. c. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. d. Copco Door Co. e. Curries Company. f. Deansteel Manufacturing, Inc. g. Kewanee Corporation (The). h. Mesker Door, Inc. i. Pioneer Industries Inc. j. Republic Builders Products. k. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A40 (ZF120) zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B coating; mill phosphatized; suitable for unexposed applications; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness where used for face sheets.

2.3 DOORS

A. General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated.

B. Interior Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level:

1. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C, (Standard Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush) 2 (Seamless).

C. Vision Lite Systems: Manufacturer's standard kits consisting of glass lite moldings to accommodate glass thickness and size of vision lite indicated.

D. Exterior Doors: Provide Galvanized exterior rated door face material.

2.4 FRAMES

A. General: Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Frames of 0.042-inch- thick steel sheet for:

1. Level 1 steel doors. 2. Wood doors where indicated.

C. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames.

D. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016-inch- thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation.

E. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042-inch- thick, electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.



1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177-inch- diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 may be used in place of steel sheet.

F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable.

2.5 SPECIAL PROVISIONS

A. Thresholds: Raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch. Standard: BHMA A156.21. Extruded aluminum in mill finish, complete with anchors and clips coordinated with pivots and floor-concealed closers, of size indicated or manufacturer’s standard, if not indicated. Coordinate with floor finishes for types required. ADA compliant.

B. Kickplates: 8”h x 1 ½” less door width. Finish US32D.

C. Maglock – Equal to: 390 + by Locknetics.

D. Keypads: Card swipe readers equal to: CR 90 by Locknetics.

E. Controller: Euqal to CT500 – KLC – SPB2 by Locknetics.

F. Power Supply: Equal to 505EIR – KLC – PLC – SBP2 by Locknetics.

G. Remote Monitoring Alarm: Equal to 800A by Locknetics.

H. Monitoring Switch: Equal to 679 – 05HM by Locknetics.

I. Power Transfer: Equal to 4612 by Adams Rite.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site.

B. Interior Door and Panel Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from the following material:

1. Cold-rolled steel sheet.

C. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door complying with SDI standards.

D. Core Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials that produce a door complying with SDI standards:

1. Resin-impregnated kraft/paper honeycomb. 2. Polyurethane. 3. Polystyrene. 4. Vertical steel stiffeners. 5. Rigid mineral-fiber board.



E. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom.

F. Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80.

G. Single-Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Square edge.

H. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

I. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

J. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts.

K. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.

1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcement, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.

L. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints. 2. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars.

M. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site.

N. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8.

O. Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard, formed from 0.032-inch- thick steel sheet.

1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.

2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified.



B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings.

2. In masonry construction, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors.

3. In existing concrete or masonry construction, provide at least three completed opening anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices.

4. In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws.

5. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. 6. For openings 90 inches or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike

jambs.

C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1G.

1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80.


A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer.

B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames.


SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory machining for hardware.


1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door frames. 2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for the following:

1. Faces of Factory-Finished Doors: Show the full range of colors available for stained finishes.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work.

2. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."



1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 UBC Standard 7-2.

1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure. 2. Temperature-Rise Rating: At exit enclosures, provide doors that have a temperature-rise

rating of 450 deg F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span.

1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion:

a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




1. Flush Wood Doors:

a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. b. Chappell Door Co. c. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. d. IPIK Door Company. e. Weyerhaeuser Company.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Doors for Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 2. Species and Cut: Red or White birch, rotary cut. 3. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. 4. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by

mullions. 5. Stiles: Same species as faces or a compatible species.

2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS

A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate

through-bolting hardware. 3. Provide doors with either glued-block or structural composite lumber cores instead of

particleboard cores at locations where exit devices are indicated.

B. Interior Veneer-Faced Doors:

1. Core: Particleboard or Glued block per hardware requirements. 2. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit

abrasive planed before veneering.

C. Fire-Rated Doors:

1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire rating indicated.

2. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer’s standard laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer stile matching face veneer.

4. Pairs: Provide fire-rated pairs with fire-retardant stiles matching face veneer that are labeled and listed for kinds of applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals.

2.4 LIGHT FRAMES



A. Metal Frames: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.0478-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; factory primed and approved for use in doors of fire rating indicated and for non-rated doors.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting.

B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

D. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated" for factory finishing.

B. Finish doors at factory.

C. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish.

D. Finish doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished.

E. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish with performance comparable to AWI System TR-

4 conversion varnish AWI System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Effect: Semifilled finish. 5. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent

permitted by labeling agency.

D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.


SECTION 08411 – ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS

08411 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Exterior and interior aluminum-framed storefronts.

a. Glazing is retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.

2. Exterior and interior manual-swing aluminum doors.


1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with aluminum-framed systems and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section.

2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements to the extent not specified in this Section.


A. General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without failure, the effects of the following:

1. Structural loads. 2. Thermal movements. 3. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,

story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 4. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 5. Failure includes the following:

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and

structural movements, to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. g. Failure of operating units to function properly.

6. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material behind.

7. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength.

B. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings.



C. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller or an amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components directly below to less than 1/8 inch and clearance between members and operable units directly below to less than 1/16 inch.

D. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds.

E. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on

framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.

F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

G. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

H. Water Penetration Under Dynamic Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to [20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

1. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating systems or appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes is not considered water leakage.

I. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to AAMA 1503.



J. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having average U-factor of not more than 0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include structural analysis data by a qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the system to the exterior.

3. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of systems, made from 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer.

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems.

H. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.

I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Capable of assuming engineering responsibility and performing work of this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer.

1. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum-framed systems including Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project and submission of reports of tests performed on manufacturer's standard assemblies.



B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

C. Accessible Entrances: Comply with [the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." ICC/ANSI A117.1. FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards." Whichever is the more restrictive.

D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."

E. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Field testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in Part 3 "Field

Quality Control" Article. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of



A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum-framed systems without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


B. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for aluminum-framed systems is based on Vistawall for the following applications as shown on drawings.

1. Center Glaze 2” x 4 ½” - Series 3000 Thermal Multiplane - front set (exterior). 2. Center Glaze 1 ¾” x 4 ½” – Series 200 Flush Glaze (interior).

C. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following, but must match the size, shape and color of the existing “Vista Wall” bronze colored systems currently on the project building:

1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Kawneer. 3. United States Aluminum. 4. YKK AP America Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Construction: Framing members for exterior applications are one-piece members that are internally slotted at regular intervals.

2. Interior members are non-thermal.



B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing

system, fabricated from stainless steel.

D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

E. Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible deflection.

F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer for joint type.

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded, that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.

2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Insulating Materials: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."

B. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.



B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members,

and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from [exterior] [interior] [interior for vision glass

and exterior for spandrel glazing or panels]. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing (without projecting stops).

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

C. High-Performance Organic Finish (3-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard 3-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color shall match existing “Vista Wall” bronze color currently on the building.

2.8 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2.9 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components.



3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation. Provide end dams where required for watertight integrity.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp or rack.

F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

G. Entrances: Install to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Entrances: Install to produce tight fit at weather stripping and weathertight closure.

2. Field-Installed Hardware: Install surface-mounted hardware according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

H. Install insulation materials as specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."

I. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce weathertight installation.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances:

1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length.

2. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.

3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch.


SECTION 08712 - DOOR HARDWARE

087100 – DOOR HARDWARE - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

0.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

0.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:

1. Swinging doors. 2. Other doors to the extent indicated.

B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware. 3. Automatic operators. 4. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”. 2. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 3. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”. 4. Division 08 Section “Automatic Door Operators”. 5. Division 08 Section “Access Control Hardware”.

D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. UL/ULC and CSA C22.2 – Standards for Automatic Door Operators Used on Fire and

Smoke Barrier Doors and Systems of Doors. 8. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.

E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:

1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies



0.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.

B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."

2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.

b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor

plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following:

1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following:

a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings.

b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams.

c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein.



2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.

D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.

E. Informational Submittals:

1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency.

F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals.


A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated.

1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.

2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.



F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document:

1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.

G. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.

1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required.

2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures

H. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".

0.6 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.



B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems.

C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.

0.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.

C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Special Warranty Periods:

1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 2. Seven years for heavy duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches. 3. Five years for standard duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches. 4. Five years for exit hardware. 5. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies. 6. Five years for motorized electric latch retraction exit devices. 7. Two years for electromechanical door hardware.

0.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

0.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.

B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for

each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.

0.2 HANGING DEVICES

A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets.

1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge

for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.

2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required:

a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.

3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.

b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.

c. Tornado Resistant Assemblies: At a minimum, provide heavy weight hinges with stainless steel screws used in accordance with and specified as part of a Severe Storm Shelter Opening meeting ICC 500 and FEMA 361.

4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following:



a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Hager Companies (HA). b. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK).

B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 certified continuous geared hinge. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut-outs.


a. Bommer Industries (BO). b. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK). c. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE).

0.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES

A. Electrified Quick Connect Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer hinges with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.


a. Hager Companies (HA) - ETW-QC (# wires) Option. b. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) -

QC (# wires) Option.

B. Electrified Quick Connect Continuous Geared Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer continuous geared hinges with a 12" removable service panel cutout accessible without de-mounting door from the frame. Furnish with Molex™ standardized plug connectors with sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.


a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) - SER-QC (# wires) Option.

b. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE) - SER-QC (# wires) Option.

C. Electric Door Wire Harnesses: Provide electric/data transfer wiring harnesses with standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors plug directly to through-



door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide sufficient number and type of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide a connector for through-door electronic locking devices and from hinge to junction box above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine the length required for each electrified hardware component for the door type, size and construction, minimum of two per electrified opening.

1. Provide one each of the following tools as part of the base bid contract: a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) -

Electrical Connecting Kit: QC-R001. b. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) -

Connector Hand Tool: QC-R003.


a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) – QC-C Series.

0.4 DOOR OPERATING TRIM

A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified.

1. Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device location approximately six feet from the floor.

2. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. 3. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L.

listed for windstorm components where applicable. 4. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required

for appropriate installation and operation.


a. Door Controls International (DC). b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

B. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates.

1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated.

2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated.

3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated.

4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets.




a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI). b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

0.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:

1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised

trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be

flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Match Facility Standard.

D. Patented Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, certified patented cylinders employing a utility patented and restricted keyway requiring the use of a patented key. Cylinders are to be protected from unauthorized manufacture and distribution by manufacturer’s United States patents. Cylinders are to be factory keyed with owner having the ability for on-site original key cutting.


a. Medeco (MC) - X4 Series. b. No Substitution.

E. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.

1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements.

2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner.

3. Existing System: Key locks to Owner's existing system.

F. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:

1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).

G. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders.

H. Key Registration List (Bitting List):



1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software.

2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.

I. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project.


a. Lund Equipment (LU). b. MMF Industries (MM). c. Telkee (TK).

J. Key Control Software: Provide one network version of "Key Wizard" branded key management software package that includes one year of technical support and upgrades to software at no charge. Provide factory key system formatted for importing into “Key Wizard” software.

0.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES

A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body.


a. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) – 8800FL Series. b. No Substitution.

B. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 2 (Standard Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 2 certified.

1. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible.


a. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 5300LN Series. b. No Substitution.

0.7 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKING DEVICES

A. Electromechanical Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical cylindrical locksets, electrified locksets to be of type and design as specified below.

1. Electrified Lock Options: Where indicated in the Hardware Sets, provide electrified options including: outside door lock/unlock trim control, latchbolt and lock/unlock status monitoring, and request-to-exit signaling. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified locksets standard as fail secure.




a. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 5480/5490LN Series. b. No Substitution.

0.8 AUXILIARY LOCKS

A. Mortise Deadlocks, Small Case: ANSI/BHMA A156.36, Grade 1, small case mortise type deadlocks constructed of heavy gauge wrought corrosion resistant steel. Steel or stainless steel bolts with a 1" throw and hardened steel roller pins. Deadlocks to be products of the same source manufacturer and keyway as other specified locksets.


a. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - 350 Series. b. No Substitution.

0.9 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for

aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for

rescue hardware applications.

B. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.

0.10 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES

A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets.



2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements.

3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets.

4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration.

5. Electromechanical Options: Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of type and design as specified in hardware sets. Include any specific controllers when conventional power supplies are not sufficient to provide the proper inrush current.

6. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts.

a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets.

b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.

7. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor.

8. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.

9. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.

10. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.

11. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.

B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature.


a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. b. No Substitution.

C. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Fabricate latchbolts from cast stainless steel, Pullman type, incorporating a deadlocking feature.





D. Tube Steel Removable Mullions: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 removable steel mullions with malleable-iron top and bottom retainers and a primed paint finish.

1. Provide keyed removable feature where specified in the Hardware Sets.

2. Provide stabilizers and mounting brackets as required.

3. Provide electrical quick connection wiring options as specified in the hardware sets.


a. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - M200 Series.

0.11 DOOR CLOSERS

A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover.

2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.

3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL.

4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.

5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.

6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install

closers on door for optimum aesthetics.

7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.

B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to



be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard.



C. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Unitrol): Unitrol arms to have door stop mechanism to absorb dead stop shock on arm and top hinge. Hold-open arms to have a spring loaded mechanism in addition to shock absorber assembly. Arms to be provided with rigid steel main arm and secondary arm lengths proportional to the door width.


a. Yale Locks and Hardware (YA) - Unitrol Series. b. No Substitution – Facility Standard.

D. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Commercial Duty): ANSI/BHMA 156.4, Grade 1 certified surface mounted, institutional grade door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck, closing sweep, and latch speed control valves. Provide non-handed units standard.



0.12 ELECTROHYDRAULIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Provide low energy operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for compliance with UL 325. Coordinate operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation devices.

1. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide door operators for fire-rated door assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated door components and are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency.

B. Standard: Certified ANSI/BHMA A156.19.

C. Performance Requirements:

1. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided, not more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf required to fully open door.

2. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing or opening.



D. Configuration: Surface mounted or in-ground as required. Door operators to control single swinging and pair of swinging doors.

E. Operation: Power opening and spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI A117.1 accessibility guideline. Provide time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle as required by ANSI/BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator to function as manual door closer with fully adjustable opening and closing forces, with or without electrical power.

F. Features: Operator units to have full feature adjustments for door opening and closing force and speed, backcheck, motor assist acceleration from 0 to 30 seconds, time delay, vestibule interface delay, obstruction recycle, and hold open time from 0 up to 30 seconds.

G. Provide outputs and relays on board the operator to allow for coordination of exit device latch retraction, electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safety and motion sensors and specified auxiliary contacts.

H. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

I. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 6000 Series.

0.13 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM

A. Door Protective Trim

1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.

3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications.

4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following:

a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick.

5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.





0.14 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders.



C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function.


a. Rixson Door Controls (RF). b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO). c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA).

0.15 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS

A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.

B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.

1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.

C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.



1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated.

E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. National Guard Products (NG). 2. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE). 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).

0.16 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES

A. Push-Button Switches: Industrial grade momentary or alternate contact, back-lighted push buttons with stainless-steel switch enclosures. 12/24 VDC bi-color illumination suitable for either flush or surface mounting.


a. Security Door Controls (SD) - 400 Series. b. Securitron (SU) - PB Series.

B. Power Supplies: Provide Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listed 12VDC or 24VDC (field selectable) filtered and regulated power supplies. Include battery backup option with integral battery charging capability in addition to operating the DC load in event of line voltage failure. Provide the least number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to exceed the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control equipment.


a. Securitron (SU) - BPS Series.

0.17 FABRICATION

A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.

0.18 FINISHES

A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.



B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware

C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

0.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.

0.2 PREPARATION

A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.

0.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.

1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals.

B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."

4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located.

C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage,



and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.

0.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.

0.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

0.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.

0.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware.

0.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS

A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.



B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:

1. MK - McKinney 2. PE - Pemko 3. RO - Rockwood 4. YA - Yale 5. SA - Sargent 6. HS - HES 7. RF - Rixson 8. NO - Norton 9. SU - Securitron

Hardware Sets

SET #01 – Door #’s 100A, 100B NOTE: Cylinder Only - Verify Type & Finish. Balance of Hardware by Door Supplier. SET #02 – Door #’s 102, 110, 114, 115 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Passage Set 9K3-0N15D S3 626 BE 1 Closer 4040 XP REG/PA AL LC 1 Floor Stop 242F US26D HA 3 Door Silencer 307D GREY HA SET #03 – Door #’s 103, 106, 107, 108, 109, 116, 117 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Lockset 9K3-7AB15D PATD S3 626 BE 1 Wall Stop 236W US32D HA 3 Door Silencer 307D GREY HA SET #04 – Door #’s 111, 112 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Push Plate 30S 4 X 16 US32D HA 1 Door Pull 33G 4 X 16 US32D HA 1 Closer 4040 XP REG/PA AL LC 1 Protection Plate 190S 8" x 34" US32D HA 1 Wall Stop 236W US32D HA 3 Door Silencer 307D GREY HA SET #05 – Door #’s 113 3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 1 Lockset 9K3-7D15D PATD S3 626 BE 1 Closer 4040 XP REG/PA AL LC 1 Protection Plate 190S 8" x 34" US32D HA 1 Wall Stop 236W US32D HA 3 Door Silencer 307D GREY HA



SET #06 – Door #’s 115A 6 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 US26D ST 2 Flush Bolt 282D US26D HA 1 Lockset 9K3-7R15D PATD S3 626 BE 2 Floor Stop 242F US26D HA 2 Door Silencer 307D GREY HA


SECTION 08800 – GLAZING

08800 – GLAZING - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications:

1. Storefront Window Systems 2. Storefront Entrance System Doors 3. Interior Doors 4. Interior Borrowed Lites


A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements:

a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated. b. Specified Design Snow Loads: As indicated. c. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically

or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.

1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.

d. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: 1 lite per 1000 for lites set more than 15 deg rees off vertical and under wind and snow action.

1) Load Duration: 30 days.

e. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6 mm. f. Thickness of Tinted and Heat-Absorbing Glass: Provide the same thickness for

each tint color indicated throughout Project.

C. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from a maximum change (range) of 120 deg F , 180 deg F in ambient and surface temperatures, respectively, acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.


08800 – GLAZING - 2

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick and a

nominal 1/2-inch- wide interspace. 4. Center-of-Glass U-Values: NFRC 100 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1

computer program, expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F . 5. Center-of-Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBL-35298

WINDOW 4.1 computer program. 6. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Samples: 12-inch- square, for each type of glass product indicated, other than monolithic clear float glass.

C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

D. Sealant compatibility and adhesion test reports.


A. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use sealant manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

B. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Where glazing products are used in fire-rated assemblies, comply with requirements of specific assembly specified in other sections of these Specifications.

1. Door Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

2. Window Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.

C. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1.

D. Glazing Publications: Comply with recommendations of the following, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM-3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines." For insulating glass

units, retain below and one more certifying organization options after verifying types of units required are certified. Not all manufacturers participate in certification programs; refer to organization directories for participants. Participants in programs listed in second and third options, are primarily window and door manufacturers.


08800 – GLAZING - 3

E. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked with certification label of Insulating Glass Certification Council

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by manufacturer, in which manufacturer agrees to furnish replacements for units that deteriorate from normal use by developing defects attributable to the manufacturing process, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within warranty period.

1. Insulating Glass:

a. Deterioration: Failure of hermetic seal resulting in obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

b. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other articles including schedules where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.

2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2.2 GLASS MATERIALS

A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select); class, kind, and condition as indicated in schedules at the end of Part 3

1. Fabrication Process: By manufacturer's option, except provide horizontal process where indicated as tongless or free of tong marks.

C. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition B (spandrel glass, one-surface ceramic coated), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select), and complying with other requirements specified in schedules at the end of Part 3..

D. Coated Float Glass: Provide coated glass complying with requirements indicated in this Article and in schedules at the end of Part 3.

1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) coated float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indicated.


08800 – GLAZING - 4

2. Provide Kind HS (heat strengthened) coated float glass, except provide Kind FT (fully tempered) products where coated safety glass is indicated.

2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:

1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Colors of Exposed Sealants: As selected.

B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 920, Type S (single component), Grade NS (nonsag), Class 25, Use NT (nontraffic), M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates indicated, O.

1. Glazing Sealant for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Sealant used in test assembly to obtain fire-protection rating.

2. Low-Modulus Nonacid-Curing Silicone: With additional movement capability of 50 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in compression when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719.

a. Available Products:

1) Dow Corning; 790. 2) GE Silicones; Silpruf &UltraPruf SCS2300] 3) Pecora Corporation; 864. 4) Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-641. 5) Sonneborn, Div of ChemRex, Inc.; Omniseal. 6) Tremco; Spectrem 1.

C. Cylindrical Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.4 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of

liquid sealant.

2.5 GLAZING GASKETS


08800 – GLAZING - 5

A. Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of type and material indicated below and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. Dense compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 846. 2. Silicone dense compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 1115. 3. Soft compression gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire-resistance rating.

2.7 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS

A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

1. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site.


08800 – GLAZING - 6

3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by sealant compatibility and adhesion testing.

4. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 5. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270

mm) unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances.

B. Protection:

1. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface.

2. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter.

C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

3.2 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Uncoated Annealed Kind HS Clear Float Glass FG-#: Class 1 (clear) Condition A (uncoated surfaces) where heat strengthening is required to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites or resist wind loads.

B. Uncoated Clear Fully Tempered Float Glass FG-#: Class 1 (clear) Kind FT (fully tempered) and Class 2 (tinted) Kind FT.

1. Available Products:

a. Provide pricing equivalent to PPG Solar Gray.

Contractor to match existing glass color of existing building.

3.3 INSULATING-GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Coated Low-E Insulating Glass IG:

1. Available Products: Contractor to match existing glass color of existing building, but the below data is provided to establish minimum performance standards and pricing.

a. Exterior Lite – PPG Solar Gray. b. Inboard Lite - PPG Soarban 60 – Clear (Coating on Third Surface). c. Inboard Lite = PPG Clear Annealed glass with third surface etched for obsure units

at toilet rooms.

2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1” & ¼” 3. Interspace Content: Argon. 4. Indoor Lite: Float glass, Class 1 (clear) float glass, Kind HS (heat strengthened),

Condition C (coated surfaces) . 5. Outdoor Lite: Float glass, Class 2 (tinted) Kind HS (heat strengthened), Condition A

(uncoated surfaces) 6. Coating: Sputtereed on third surface.


08800 – GLAZING - 7

B. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass SG: Where glass of this designation is indicated, provide ceramic-coated spandrel glass inboard lite of insulation assembly complying with the following:

1. Outboard Lite: Float glass, class 2 (tinted) Kind HS Condition A. 2. Inboard Lite: Float glass Class 1 Clear Ceramic Coating on Fourth Surface. a. Ceramic Coating Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.


SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Non-load-bearing steel framing.


1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation installed in gypsum board assemblies.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work.

C. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Consolidated Systems, Inc. b. Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incor. c. Dietrich Industries, Inc. d. National Gypsum Company. e. Unimast, Inc.

2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. G-P Gypsum Corp. b. National Gypsum Company. c. United States Gypsum Co.

2.2 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

B. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire.

C. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: As follows:

1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a qualified independent testing agency.

a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor.

2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Hangers: As follows:

1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter.

E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch, a minimum 1/2-inch- wide flange, manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.



F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating.

1. Cold Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flange, 3/4 inch deep.

2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. b. Depth: As required for spans between supports.

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.

a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.

2.3 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Components, General: As follows:

1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with

manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating.

B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated.

C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.

D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flange.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.

E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch.

F. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

2.4 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD

A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36.



1. Type X:

a. Thickness: 5/8 inch. b. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at

exposed panel edges. c. L-Bead: Use at abutting dissimilar materials. d. Reveal Joint: F-Bead or U-shaped bead. Use where indicated. e. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated or if not indicated at spacing not to

exceed forty feet in any direction.

B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. MM Systems Corporation. d. Pittcon Industries.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063-T5.

3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.



a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:

a. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corp.; BA-98. c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.

2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other



conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:

1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed-on fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c.

2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of gypsum board assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook."

C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

1. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure. 2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install

slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly.

3.4 INSTALLING STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.



2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards.

3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Secure hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms.

6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

B. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.

C. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.

D. Clip furring channels to supports.

1. Hangers: 48 inches. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches.

3.5 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING

A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction.

B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing.

C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.

1. Cut studs 1/2 inch short of full height to provide perimeter relief. 2. For fire-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of

floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated.

D. Install steel studs and furring at the following spacings:



1. Single-Layer Construction: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

F. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint. 3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof

structure above.

G. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

3.6 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.

B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.

H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

I. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural

members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to



fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

K. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.

1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications.

L. Finish Glass Fiber-faced exterior soffit board to be painted according to manufacturer’s published guidelines.

3.7 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS

A. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

B. Multilayer Application on Ceilings: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

C. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

D. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

E. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES



A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:

1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies.

2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges where panels are substrate for acoustical tile.

3. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges where flat paint finish or wallcoverings are indicated.

4. Level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire surface where gloss or semi-gloss painted finish is indicated.


SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE

09310 - CERAMIC TILE - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Floor Tile in interior applications – at Toilet Rooms

2. Tile Cove Base in interior applications – at Toilet Rooms

3. Wall Tile in interior applications – at Toilet Rooms (Wainscoting)

4. Bullnose Tile in interior applications – at Toilet Rooms (top of Wainscoting)

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include tile locations and patterns. Include details and locations of contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

C. Samples: Sample of each type and color grout required.


A. Mockups: Install mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.

1. Install mockups of each pattern and tile installation type of minimum foor foot square area.

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the Daltile

“Portfolio” Colorbody Porcelain collection or approved equal. Provide two colors. One for the floor and one for the wall wainscoting, cove base and upper bullnose. Provide matching cove and bullnose corners where applicable.

2.2 CERAMIC TILE



A. Floor Tile: for Toilet Rooms

1. Size: 12” x 24” 2. Thickness: 3/8 inch

B. Wall Tile: for Toilet Rooms

1. Size: 6” x 24” 2. Thickness: 3/8 inch

C. Cove Base: for Toilet Rooms

1. Size: 6” x 12”

D. Bullnose: for Toilet Rooms at top of Wainscoting.

1. Size: 3” x 12”

E. Grout Materials:

1. Grout for Joints Wider Than 1/8 Inch : ANSI A118.6, sanded latex-portland cement.

a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range

F. Setting Materials: 1. Thin-Set Mortar: ANSI A118.1, nonsagging, dry-set portland cement. 2. Setting Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I, organic.

2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Cleavage Membrane: NobleSeal CIS – Crack Isolation System by the Noble Company

B. Waterproofing for Interior Thin-Set Applications: ANSI A118.10.

1. Polyethylene Sheet:

a. Product: Noble Company (The); Nobleseal.

2. Latex Rubber:

a. Available Products:

1) Custom Building Products; Trowel & Seal Waterproof Membrane. 2) Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane. 3) Summitville Tiles, Inc.; S-9000.

3. Acrylic Latex:

a. Product: Mapei Corporation; PRP 315.



C. Stone Thresholds: Uniform in color and finish, fabricated to produce transition from tile surfaces to adjoining surfaces and to be not more than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) above an adjacent floor finish with transition edges beveled on a slope of not greater than 1:2.

1. Material: Marble, complying with ASTM C 503 requirements for exterior use and with minimum abrasive hardness value of 10 per ASTM C 241

2. Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range

D. Elastomeric Sealants: ASTM C 920.

1. Non-Traffic Surfaces: One-part, mildew-resistant silicone, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to substrate, O; with fungicide.

a. Products:

1) Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. 2) GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700. 3) Pecora Corp.; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. 4) Rhone-Poulenc, Inc.; Rhodorsil 6B White. 5) Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 600 White.

2. Traffic Surfaces: Multipart, pourable urethane, Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to substrate, O.

a. Products:

1) Bostik; Chem-Calk 550. 2) Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 245. 3) Pecora Corp.; NR-200 Urexpan. 4) Tremco, Inc.; THC-900.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Installation Methods: Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA designations indicated.

B. Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" applicable to installation methods and setting and grouting materials indicated.

C. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for installations indicated.


D. Apply trowelable leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.

E. Remove substrate protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.



F. Waterproofing: Install to produce a waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is securely bonded to substrate.

1. Install under tile for toilet rooms and wet areas on framed floors. 2. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and has passed testing

to determine that it is watertight.

G. Back Buttering: Produce 100 percent mortar coverage on tile backs to comply with applicable special requirements for back buttering in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards in the following locations:

1. Floors composed of 8-by-8-inch tile or larger.

H. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to produce a complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

I. Accurately form intersections and returns. Cut and drill tile without marring visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items to produce straight aligned joints. Fit tile to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

J. Jointing Pattern: Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths.

1. Lay tile in grid pattern.

K. Joint Widths: Produce uniform joint widths as follows:

1. Floor Tile:

a. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/4 inch .

L. Expansion Joints: Form expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint

Sealants."

M. Grout: Install to comply with ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated.

N. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.

O. Cleaning: After grouting, clean ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of grout and foreign matter.



1. Temporary Protective Coating: Remove by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturers. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains.

3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Interior Installation Method:

1. TCA Designation: F122 (thin-set mortar bonded to waterproof membrane over framed concrete slab) for framed slabs.

2. TCA Designation: F113 (thin-set mortar bonded to concrete slab-on-grade)


SECTION 09330 – SYNTHETIC MARBLE

09330 – SYNTHETIC MARBLE - 1

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnishing and installing synthetic marble interior window stools (sills). 1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Drawings showing locations, sizes, specific edge treatment: B. Product Data. 1. Manufacturer’s literature or cut sheet. 2. Color Selections. 3. Adhesive data. C. Samples. 1. For initial selection – full product line. 2. For final selection – 6” section.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Sheet

1. Solid surfacing material mixture of natural minerals and resins with sealed surfaces. 2. Size 3/4 inch thick x width and depth as field measured. 3. Profile – Square polished face edge. 4. Colors – selected from full line by Architect. 5. Approved Manufacturers a. Cencor by Bermax, Inc., Salt Lake City, Utah 1-800-262-2284. B. Adhesive – As recommended by Manufacturer for substrates indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine all substances for level and square and remove all irregularities. B. Scribe materials to edges of aluminum windows and jambs for tight fit not to exceed 1/8 inch joint. C. Install as one-piece. Cut to fit for 1/2 inch overhang. Polish and seal exposed ends.


SECTION 09511 – ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. AC: Articulation Class.

B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.

C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.

D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension system members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.

3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch square. Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch- (300-mm-)

long Samples of each type, finish, and color.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements:



1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:

a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 1.0 percent of quantity installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.



B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.

1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.

C. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING

A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1. Rockfon 1060 SL or equal

B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows:

1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 1, nodular.

C. Color: White. D. LR: Not less than 0.86. E. NRC: Not less than 0.85. F. Edge Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension system members. G. Thickness: 5/8 inch. H. Size: 24 by 24 inches I. Antimicrobial Treatment: Panel based

2.3 SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.

B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.

1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated.

2. Provide High-Humidity finish in Kitchen Areas to coordinate with scrubbable tile.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.



D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 inch diameter wire.

E. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide; formed with 0.04-inch- (1-mm-) thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- (8-mm-) diameter bolts.

G. Hold-Down Clips: Where required, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. on all cross tees.

2.4 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL PANEL ACCENT CLOUD CEILINGS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide systems equal to Armstrong “Formations” as described below:

1. Formations Round Floating Cloud System 2. Axom Vector Trim Type – Clear Anodized 6” high curved face frame / Inverted Profile 3. Cloud Sizes: Two floating clouds (a 20’-0” diameter cloud and a 13’-0” diameter cloud) 4. Panel Type – 24” x 48” MetalWorks Effects Dark Cherry (FXDC) Micro-perforated with

solid concealed backing layer to eliminate light transference from above. The color is listed for pricing purposes. Actual selected color may change during the submittal process.

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Chicago Metallic Corporation or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., USG Interiors, Inc. or equal.

B. Standard-Face, Capped, Double-Web Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Butt-edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

1. Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated design.

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

4. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

5. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

6. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

7. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

8. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.



9. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 10. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 11. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported

directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.

12. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.

1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:

a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. b. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to short axis of space. c. Install panels in a basket-weave pattern.

2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings.

3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.

4. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.

5. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

6. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

7. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.


SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOORING

09651 - RESILIENT FLOORING - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Resilient wall base and accessories (CB). 2. Floating Luxury Vinyl Tile (LVT) and accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required.

1. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color and pattern required.

D. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.



D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.

E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500

linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 COLORS AND PATTERNS

A. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 LUXURY VINYL TILE - LVT

A. Luxury Vinyl Tile (VCT): equal to – Natural Creations Arbor Art by Armstrong Flooring or approved equal.

2.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE - RCB

A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861.

1. Johnsonite 2. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc. 3. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. 4. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co. 5. Nora Rubber Flooring, Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. 6. Roppe Corporation

B. Type (Material Requirement): TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or TP (rubber, thermoplastic).

C. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid, homogeneous) or II (layered).

D. Style: Cove (with top-set toe).



E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.

F. Height: 4 inches.

G. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.

H. Outside Corners: Premolded.

I. Inside Corners: Job formed.

J. Surface: Smooth.

K. Color: Consider up to 6 different colors with approximate equal quantities throughout building for pricing.

2.5 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Description: Carpet bar carpet edge for glue-down applications. Reducer strip for resilient floor covering. Joiner for tile and carpet.

1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products 2. Johnsonite 3. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc. 4. Roppe Corporation

B. Material: Rubber.

C. Profile and Dimensions: As selected from manufacturer’s full line for conditions required.

2.6 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed

with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.

E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 TILE INSTALLATION

A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles square with room axis.

B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern).

C. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings.

D. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.



E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

F. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of tile installed on covers. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

G. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

3.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION

A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.

E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

F. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces.

G. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.

3.5 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.



3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.

B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1. Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer.

a. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.

2. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion.

3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels.


SECTION 09680 – CARPET TILE

09680 – CARPET TILE - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Carpet Tile System.


1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" "Resilient Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate required.

B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full size sample. 2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessories: As required.

C. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

D. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Product Options: Products and manufacturers named in Part 2 establish requirements for product quality in terms of appearance, construction, and performance. Other manufacturers' products comparable in quality to named products and complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."




A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."


A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity."

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TYPES

A. Furnish carpet specified below or an equal product approved prior to bidding.

1. Contract Carpet: 24” X 24” Carpet Tiles



2. Color to be determined. Reference drawings for multi-colored and/or patterned layout schemes.

3. Construction: Random Graphic Patterned Loop with mergeable dye lot capabilities 4. Fiber Content: Minimum 90% solution dyed and 10% yarn dyed with Shaw Soil

Protection, FlorSept antimicrobial and permanent static control. 5. Gauge: 1/12 6. Stitches per inch: 9.0 7. Tufted Pile Height: 5/32 or .156” 8. Average Minimum Density: 7,355 ozs. 9. Primary Backing: Non-Woven Synthetic 10. Secondary Backing: EcoWorx –Non PVC 11. Warranty: Lifetime commercial limited 12. Radiant Panel: ASTM-E-648-Class I 13. See Carpet Allowance.

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided by or recommended by the following:

1. Carpet manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is recommended by the following:


C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the following:

a. Carpet manufacturer.

2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet.



3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.

C. For wood subfloors, verify the following:

1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."

2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet installation.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by the following:


D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down Installation."

B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. 1. Level adjoining border edges.

C. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.

D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.

E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.



G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.

H. Install carpet cushion seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.


SECTION 09912 - PAINTING

09912 - PAINTING - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces.

1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.

B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.

1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.

C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.

1. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

D. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 5 Section “Structural Steel” for shop priming structural steel. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. 3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and frames. 4. Division 8 Section "Custom Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and

frames. 5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of gypsum board. 6. Division 9 Section "Multicolored Spray Coatings" for spray-applied interior multicolored

coatings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.

1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter.

2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.

1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat material indicated.

1. After color selection, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each

Sample for location and application. 2. Submit 2 Samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture

only:

a. Concrete: 4-by-6-inch Samples for each color and finish. b. Concrete Unit Masonry: 4-by-8-inch Samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the

center, for each finish and color. c. Painted Wood: 4-by-6 inch square Samples for each color and material on

hardboard. d. Stained or Natural Wood: 4-by-6 inch Samples of natural- or stained-wood finish

on representative surfaces. e. Ferrous Metal: 4-by-6 inch square Samples of flat metal.

D. Qualification Data: For Applicator.


A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals.

1. Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate.

a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.



2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface.

a. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature.

3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name:

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.


A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F.

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F.

C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.

1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with one unopened gallon of extra paint materials of each color used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products of manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work include the following, others may be considered according to submittal of requests for substitution per Division 1 requirements. Only paints incorporated into the State of Tennessee’s contract buying program are eligible for consideration for this project.

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Sherwin-Williams Co. 3. PPG Paints

B. Products indicated are those of the Benjamin Moore company. Other equal products of the above listed manufacturers are approved.

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.

1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.

C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 EXTERIOR PRIMERS – Exterior Paint Spec not used, but listed for potential Scope Change Items for the project.

A. Exterior Primer for Acrylic Latex Flat Paint:

1. Benjamin Moore; Fresh Start All Purpose 100% Acrylic Primer.

B. Exterior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated rust-inhibitive metal primer for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils.

C. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils.

D. Interior Cement Masonry Primer; Factory Formulated latex-based primer for interior applications.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler No. 285.



2.4 INTERIOR PRIMERS

A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.

B. Interior Plaster Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.

C. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal primer.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils.

2.5 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS Exterior Paint Spec not used, but listed for potential Scope Change Items for the project.

A. Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Flat Latex House Paint No. 171: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.

B. Exterior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Factory-formulated full-gloss alkyd enamel for exterior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Urethane Alkyd Enamel M22: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils.

2.6 INTERIOR FINISH COATS

A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for interior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.

B. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic-latex enamel for interior application.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils.

C. Interior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel for Wood and Metal Surfaces: Factory-formulated full-gloss alkyd interior enamel.

1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Urethane Alkyd Enamel No. M22: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4.

1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.

2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area.

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.

B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.

1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and

mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.

a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate

tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.



3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.

a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.

c. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall

construction occurs on back side. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of

varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.

4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. a. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged.

Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.

5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.

E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions

detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,

grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in



place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.

5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles.

7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match

exterior. 10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.

2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional

coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted.

2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces.

F. Mechanical items other than galvanized or non corrosive finished to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Uninsulated metal piping. 2. Pipe hangers and supports. 3. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.



G. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.

H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

I. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

J. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.

1. Provide satin finish for final coats.

K. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.

L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.


A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied:

1. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by Owner:

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site.

1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.


09912 - PAINTING - 10

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.

1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.

3.7 PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Schedules on drawings generally indicate types of systems and locations the Architect reserves the right to modify components of these systems regarding finishes for miscellaneous items such as trim that may not be indicated.

3.8 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE Exterior Paint Spec not used, but listed for potential Scope Change Items for the project.

A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items.

1. Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer.

a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss urethane alkyd enamel.

3.9 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Unit Masonry: Provide the following paint systems over interior concrete masonry substrates:

1. Semigloss Acrylic-Latex Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior block filler primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semi-gloss latex acrylic enamel.

B. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint.

2. Semigloss Latex-Acrylic Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss latex-acrylic enamel.

C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:


09912 - PAINTING - 11

1. Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.

a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss alkyd enamel for wood and metal surfaces.


SECTION 10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

10520 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire-protection cabinets. 3. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, panel style,

and details of installation.

B. Maintenance data.


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows:

1. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

D. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear).

2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Ansul Incorporated. 2. JL Industries, Inc. 3. Kidde Fyrnetics. 4. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 5. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.

B. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.

1. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B.

C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Larsen’s Architectural Series or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Semi-Recessed 2-1/2” – 2409 – 6R 2. Recessed – 2409 – R2

B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

C. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.

D. Cabinet Material and Shelf: Aluminum sheet.

E. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated.



1. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend) of 1/4 to 5/16 inch.

F. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth.

G. Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall; with no trim.

H. Cabinet Trim Material: Aluminum sheet or Extruded-aluminum shapes.

I. Door Material: Aluminum sheet or Extruded-aluminum shapes.

J. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.

K. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear.

L. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard.

M. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."

1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Decals or Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 3) Lettering Color: Red. 4) Orientation: Vertical.

N. Finishes:

1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: a. Interior of cabinet.

2. Aluminum Door Frame: Class I, clear anodic coating complying with AAMA 611.

a. Color and Texture: Clear, brushed.

2.5 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Available Manufacturers:



1. Ansul Incorporated. 2. JL Industries, Inc. 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 4. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.

B. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

1. Color: Red.

C. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick.

2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets will be installed.

B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.

C. Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

D. Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets.



2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.

F. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.

G. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding.

H. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair.


SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Toilet and bath accessories.


1. Division 8 Section "Mirrored Glass" for frameless mirrors. 2. Division 10 Section "Toilet Compartments" for compartments and screens.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions, profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory specified.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. Use designations indicated in the Toilet and Bath Accessory Schedule and room designations indicated on Drawings in product schedule.

C. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations.


A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by Architect.

1. Do not modify aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's

approval. Where modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in



addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide accessories by one of the following:

1. Toilet and Bath Accessories:

a. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. b. American Specialties, Inc. c. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. d. Bradley Corporation. e. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). f. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; ASTM B 30, castings.

C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359-inch minimum nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish.

D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180).

E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal.

F. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

G. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: One, maximum 1-1/2-inch- diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.

B. General: Names or labels are not permitted on exposed faces of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface of each accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.



C. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainless-steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible.

D. Recessed Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all-welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, stainless-steel hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed.

E. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated.

C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to method in ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE

A. Indications relate to quantities and locations. Model numbers “B” are from Bobrick, Model numbers “A” are from American Specialties, unless otherwise noted. Alternate selections shall match in construction, materials, size, finish and function.

1. Toilet Paper Holder Provided by Owner & installed by Contractor 2. 42” Grab Bar B6206 x 42” 3. 30” Grab Bar B6206 x 30” 4. Paper Towel Dispenser Provided by Owner & installed by Contractor 5. Feminine Napkin Disposal Rubbermaid Model 6140 White 6. Mop Rack B223 x 24” 7. 36” x 36” Mirror B166 3636 (integrated bottom shelf is not included) 8. Soap Dispenser Provided by Owner & installed by Contractor

SECTION 12 24 00 – SHADES

ROLLER SHADES – 12 24 00 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. MechoShade Systems, Inc. 2. Draper. 3. SilentGliss

2.02 SHADE TYPES:

A. Shade Type 1: Manual operating, chain drive, roller shades.

2.03 SHADE CLOTH

A. Visual Transparent Single-Fabric Shadecloth: ThermoVeil Dense Basket Weave 1300 Series (5% Open).

a Content: 75% PVC (Coating), 25% Polyester (Yarn).

b Openness Factor: Approx. 5%

c NFPA 701-2004: Pass

d Color: As selected by the Designer.

B. All seaming shall occur over window mullions and at a consistent elevation throughout the room.

C. The cloth shall be railroaded when the window is wider than 96" for room darkening cloth and 120" for all other cloth.

2.04 SHADE BAND

A. Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the hem weight, hem-pocket, shade roller tube, and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open hem pockets are not acceptable. 1. Hem Pockets and Hem Weights: Fabric hem pocket with RF-welded seams (including

welded ends) and concealed hem weights. Hem weights shall be of appropriate size and weight for shade band. Hem weight shall be continuous inside a sealed hem pocket. Hem pocket construction and hem weights shall be similar, for all shades within one room.

2. Shade band and Shade Roller Attachment: a. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness

required to support shade fabric without excessive deflection. Roller tubes less than 1.55 inch (39.37 mm) in diameter for manual shades, and less than 2.55 inches (64.77 mm) for motorize shades are not acceptable.

b. Provide for positive mechanical engagement with drive / brake mechanism. c. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade

band shall be made removable / replaceable with a "snap-on" snap-off" spline mounting, without having to remove shade roller from shade brackets.



d. Mounting spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets.

e. Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of: adhesive, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets are not acceptable.

2.05 SHADE FABRICATION

A. Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb, unless specifically indicated otherwise.

B. Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat-sealed trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided shadecloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) in either direction per 8 feet (2438 mm) of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design. Fabricate hem as follows: 1. Bottom hem weights. 2. Concealed hemtube. 3. Exposed blackout hembar with light seal.

C. Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling of the shadebands. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width-to-height (W:H) ratios shall not exceed manufacturer's standards or, in absence of such standards, shall be responsible for establishing appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and rolling of the shadecloth within specified standards. Battens shall be roll-formed stainless steel or tempered steel, as required.

D. For railroaded shadebands, provide seams in railroaded multi-width shadebands as required to meet size requirements and in accordance with seam alignment as acceptable to the Designer. Seams shall be properly located. Furnish battens in place of plain seams when the width, height, or weight of the shade exceeds manufacturer’s standards. In absence of such standards, assure proper sue of seams or battens as required to, and assure the proper tracking of the railroaded multi-width shadebands.

2.06 COMPONENTS

A. Access and Material Requirements: 1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets

without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to be removed.

2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets.

3. Use only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade hardware. Styrene based plastics, and /or polyester, or reinforced polyester will not be acceptable.

B. Manual Operated Chain Drive Hardware and Brackets:



1. Provide for universal, regular and offset drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall at front, rear or non-offset for all shade drive end brackets. Universal offset shall be adjustable for future change.

2. Provide hardware capable for installation of a removable fascia, for both regular and/or reverse roll, which shall be installed without exposed fastening devices of any kind.

3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for removable regular and/or reverse roll fascias to be mounted continuously across two or more shade bands without requiring exposed fasteners of any kind.

4. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands (multibanded shades) by a single chain operator, subject to manufacturer’s design criteria. Connectors shall be offset to assure alignment from the first to the last shade band.

5. Provide shade hardware system that allows multi-banded manually operated shades to be capable of smooth operation when the axis is offset a maximum of 6 degrees on each side of the plane perpendicular to the radial line of the curve, for a 12 degrees total offset.

6. Provide positive mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to shade roller tube. Friction fit connectors for drive mechanism connection to shade roller tube are not acceptable

7. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) thick plated steel or heavier as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade.

8. Drive Bracket / Brake Assembly: a. MechoShade Drive Bracket model M5 shall be fully integrated with all

MechoShade accessories, including, but not limited to: SnapLoc fascia, room darkening side / sill channels, center supports and connectors for multi-banded shades.

b. M5 drive sprocket and brake assembly shall rotate and be supported on a welded 3/8 inch (9.525 mm) steel pin.

c. The brake shall be an over running clutch design which disengages to 90 percent during the raising and lowering of a shade. The brake shall withstand a pull force of 50 lbs. (22 kg) in the stopped position.

d. The braking mechanism shall be applied to an oil-impregnated hub on to which the brake system is mounted. The oil impregnated hub design includes an articulated brake assembly, which assures a smooth, non-jerky operation in raising and lowering the shades. The assembly shall be permanently lubricated. Products that require externally applied lubrication and or not permanently lubricated are not acceptable.

e. The entire M5 assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel support bracket, and fully independent of the shade tube assembly, which may be removed and reinstalled without effecting the roller shade limit adjustments.

f. Provide chain retainers.

C. Drive Chain with clip: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 lb. (41 kg) minimum breaking strength. Nickel plate chain shall not be accepted.

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Fascia at exposed locations:



1. Continuous removable extruded aluminum fascia that attaches to shade mounting brackets without the use of adhesives, magnetic strips, or exposed fasteners.

2. Fascia shall be able to be installed across two or more shade bands in one piece. 3. Fascia shall fully conceal brackets, shade roller and fabric on the tube. 4. Provide bracket / fascia end caps where mounting conditions expose outside of roller

shade brackets. 5. Notching of Fascia for manual chain shall not be acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Designer of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face of glass. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware.

B. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

C. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain roller shade systems.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

3.05 WARRANTY



A. Warranty: Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of Substantial Completion, not including scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas.

END OF SECTION

Hangars & Supports - Plumbing 220529 - 1

SECTION 220529 – Hangars & Supports - Plumbing

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.2. Trapeze pipe hangers.3. Metal framing systems.4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.5. Fastener systems.6. Pipe positioning systems.7. Equipment supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Section 220516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides and anchors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.


3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers.2. Metal framing systems.3. Fiberglass strut systems.4. Pipe stands.5. Equipment supports.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.


A. Welding certificates.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion

to support bearing surface of piping.5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.


B. Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion

to support bearing surface of piping.3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.c. Flex-Strut Inc.d. GS Metals Corp.e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.f. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: MFMA-4.4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into

channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.7. Metallic Coating: Electroplated zinc.8. Paint Coating: Vinyl9. Plastic Coating: PVC.

B. Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:


a. Anvil International; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc.b. Empire Industries, Inc.c. ERICO International Corporation.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456808509&mf=04&src=wd











d. Haydon Corporation; H-Strut Division.e. NIBCO INC.f. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.g. PHS Industries, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4.4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into

channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.7. Coating: PVC.

2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.2. Clement Support Services.3. ERICO International Corporation.4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.5. PHS Industries, Inc.6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc.7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.9. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig (688-kPa) or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862-kPa) minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psig (688-kPa)] or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862-kPa) minimum compressive strength.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.















2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, [zinc-coated] [stainless-] steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.6 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.

2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.


2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture.

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

N. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.


b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.


4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick.

b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and

0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and

0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thick.e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and

0.105 inch (2.67 mm) thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.


3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and

so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40 mm).

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are as specified.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.


B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and fiberglass pipe hangers and fiberglass strut systems and stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant attachments for hostile environment applications.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F (566 deg C), pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24 (DN 100 to DN 600), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36 (DN 20 to DN 900), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 (DN 15 to DN 600) if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 15 to DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).

7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8 (DN 10 to DN 200).

11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3 (DN 10 to DN 80).


12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.

14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900) if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN 25 to DN 750), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24 (DN 65 to DN 600), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 24 to DN 600).

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600) if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various

types of building attachments.5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232

deg C) piping installations.

L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.


4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required

tangent to flange edge.8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads.10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from

above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is

required.15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to

linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

N. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

O. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

Q. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.

END OF SECTION

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1

SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.2. Warning signs and labels.3. Pipe labels.4. Stencils.5. Valve tags.6. Warning tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch (0.64-mm) or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm)] minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with

substrate.

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).

3. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

4. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

5. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.6. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with

substrate.

C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.


2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).

C. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

D. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

E. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

F. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

G. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)high.

2.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.

1. Tag Material: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch (0.64-mm) or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.


B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.5 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches (75 by 133 mm) minimum.2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or

"DO NOT OPERATE."4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal

units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.


4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals

to 25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment.7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced

labels.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Cold Water: 2 inches (50 mm), round.b. Hot Water: 2 inches (50 mm), round.c. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: 2 inches (50 mm), round.d. High-Pressure Compressed Air: 2 inches (50 mm), round.

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.


PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 1

SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic cold-water piping.2. Domestic hot-water piping.3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping.4. Domestic chilled-water piping for drinking fountains.5. Sanitary waste piping exposed to freezing conditions.6. Storm-water piping exposed to freezing conditions.7. Roof drains and rainwater leaders.8. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.


1. Section 220716 "Plumbing Equipment Insulation."


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for

each type of insulation.5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and

access panels.6. Detail application of field-applied jackets.7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.


C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50).

2. Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50).3. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square.4. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full

range of colors available for each type of finish material.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

C. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1889&mf=04&src=wd







2. Type I, 850 Deg F (454 Deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, [without factory-applied jacket] [with factory-applied ASJ] [with factory-applied ASJ-SSL]. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127.

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B.

Fuller Company; 85-60/85-70.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone.b. Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding

Adhesive.c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.d. Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive.


3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."















2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.


a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-80/30-90.

b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C).

4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.5. Color: White.

2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-50 AHV2.

b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-36.

c. Vimasco Corporation; 713 and 714.

3. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.

4. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C).5. Color: White.

2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:












1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2.6 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836.c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm).3. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm).4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width.5. Elongation: 2 percent.6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width.7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

2.7 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping and Seals.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with wing seal or closed seal.

3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with wing seal or closed seal.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-mm) nickel-copper alloy.


a. C & F Wire.












2.8 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:


a. Engineered Brass Company.b. Insul-Tect Products Co.; a subsidiary of MVG Molded Products.c. McGuire Manufacturing.d. Plumberex.e. Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation.f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:


a. Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation.b. Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.

2.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.


a. Johns Manville; Zeston.b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke.d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

















3. Color: White4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field

fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.


F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material

as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at [2 inches (50 mm)] [4 inches (100 mm)] o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.


O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.2. Testing agency labels and stamps.3. Nameplates and data plates.4. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof

surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm).

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:


1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.


9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.


2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

3.8 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.


C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.2. Underground piping.3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.11 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Water ( hot & cold):

1. Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch (13 mm) thick.

B. Stormwater and Overflow:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:



C. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies:



D. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be The following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.

E. Floor Drains, Traps, and Sanitary Drain Piping within 10 Feet (3 m) of Drain Receiving Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F (16 Deg C):



END OF SECTION

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings.

2. Encasement for piping.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 221113 "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water-service piping and water meters] outside the building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.


A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.


A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not interrupt water service without Architect's and Owner's written permission.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) tube, drawn temper.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A) water tube, annealed temper.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123.2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

G. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:


a. Muller Industries.b. NIBCO Inc.c. Viega.

2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal in each end.

3. Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal in each end.

H. Copper Push-on-Joint Fittings:





a. Victaulic Company.

2. Description:

a. Cast-copper fitting complying with ASME B16.18 or wrought-copper fitting complying with ASME B 16.22.

b. Stainless-steel teeth and EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal in each end instead of solder-joint ends.

I. Appurtenances for Grooved-End Copper Tubing:


a. Anvil International.b. Shurjoint Piping Products.c. Victaulic Company.

2. Bronze Fittings for Grooved-End, Copper Tubing: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M) copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze castings.

3. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved-End Copper Tubing:

a. Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606.b. Ferrous housing sections.c. EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water.d. Bolts and nuts.e. Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig

2.3 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.

B. Form: Sheet or tube.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined.2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.






C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.


a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing.b. Dresser, Inc.; Piping Specialties Products.c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).d. JCM Industries.e. Romac Industries, Inc.f. Smith-Blair, Inc.; a Sensus company.g. Viking Johnson.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:


a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.b. Harvel Plastics, Inc.c. Spears Manufacturing Company.

2. Description:

a. CPVC or PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions.

b. One end with threaded brass insert and one solvent-cement-socket or threaded end.

E. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:


a. Colonial Engineering, Inc.b. NIBCO Inc.c. Spears Manufacturing Company.

2. Description:

a. CPVC or PVC four-part union.b. Brass or stainless-steel threaded end.c. Solvent-cement-joint or threaded plastic end.d. Rubber O-ring.e. Union nut.















2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Hart Industries International, Inc.d. Jomar International.e. Matco-Norca.f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.h. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079.3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C).4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Matco-Norca.d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.e. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079.3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C).5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded

solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.

















c. Central Plastics Company.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:


a. Elster Perfection Corporation.b. Grinnell Mechanical Products; Tyco Fire Products LP.c. Matco-Norca.d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.e. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107

deg C).5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install underground copper tube and ductile-iron pipe in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.

D. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.









E. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

F. Install domestic water piping level and plumb.

G. Install seismic restraints on piping.

H. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

I. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

J. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

K. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

L. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

M. Install piping free of sags and bends.

N. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

O. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

P. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping.

Q. Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater.

R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.


C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are

corroded or damaged.

D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter.

E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

G. Push-on Joints for Copper Tubing: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with manufacturer's depth gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting tube to measured depth.

3.4 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions.

3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.

D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch (10 mm).

E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

G. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated,

but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than that required by plumbing code.


3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials.


Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate

flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified

for application where used and are clean and ready for use.8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and

operation.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:


1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.

D. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A); wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); cast- or wrought-

copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper pressure-

seal-joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.3. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper push-on-

joint fittings; and push-on joints.

F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); cast- or wrought-]copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.

2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.

3. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); grooved-joint, copper-tube appurtenances; and grooved joints.


3.13 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.

C. Iron grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.

END OF SECTION

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.2. Specialty pipe fittings.3. Encasement for underground metal piping.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.




A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.




A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.


A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner and Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary waste service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without Owner’s and Architect’s written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra Heavy classes.

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.3 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and deaerator drainage fittings.

C. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:



a. ANACO-Husky.b. Charlotte Pipec. Fernco Inc.d. MIFAB, Inc.e. Tyler Pipe.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and

tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

D. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


a. ANACO-Husky.b. Charlotte Pipec. MIFAB, Inc.d. Tyler Pipe.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540.3. Description: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening

devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

E. Cast-Iron, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


a. MG Piping Products Company.

2. Standard: ASTM C 1277.3. Description: Two-piece ASTM A 48/A 48M, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel

bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

2.4 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint fittings.

C. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type B and Type C), water tube, drawn temper.












D. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, annealed temper.

E. Copper Pressure Fittings:

1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

F. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end.

1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux.

2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.6 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:


1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Anaco Husky2) Fernco Inc.3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1173.c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern.

Include shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

d. Sleeve Materials:

1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926,

PVC.3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material

compatible with pipe materials being joined.

4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:


1) Fernco

2) Mifab3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1460.c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-

resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

5. Pressure Transition Couplings:










1) Fernco2) Mifab3) Mission Rubber4) Romac Industries, Inc.5) Viking Johnson.

b. Standard: AWWA C219.c. Description: Metal, sleeve-type same size as, with pressure rating at least

equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.d. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard.e. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.f. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

2. Dielectric Unions:


1) Capitol Manufacturing Company.2) Central Plastics Company.3) Hart Industries International, Inc.4) Jomar International Ltd.5) Matco-Norca, Inc.6) McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.7) Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.8) Wilkins; a Zurn company.

b. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079.2) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F 3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

3. Dielectric Flanges:


1) Capitol Manufacturing Company.2) Central Plastics Company.3) Matco-Norca, Inc.4) Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.5) Wilkins; a Zurn company.



















b. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079.2) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.3) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F 4) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous;

threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

4. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


1) Advance Products & Systems, Inc.2) Calpico, Inc.3) Central Plastics Company.4) Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

b. Description:

1) Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig 3) Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.4) Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.5) Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

5. Dielectric Nipples:


1) Elster Perfection.2) Grinnell Mechanical Products.3) Matco-Norca, Inc.4) Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.5) Victaulic Company.

b. Description:

1) Standard: IAPMO PS 662) Electroplated steel nipple.3) Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F 4) End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.5) Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

2.7 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.













B. Material: Linear low-density polyethylene film of 0.008-inch or high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film of 0.004-inch minimum thickness.

C. Form: Sheet or tube.

D. Color: Black or natural.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

K. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two


fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

L. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

M. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

N. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.

O. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

P. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.

Q. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.

R. Plumbing Specialties:1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to

building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

S. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Retain first paragraph below for piping that penetrates an exterior concrete wall or concrete slab.

U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.


3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead-and-oakum calked joints.

C. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

D. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder.

E. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe according to AWWA C606. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections, over gasket, with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.

F. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern.

G. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.

3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's.2. In Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.4. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

C. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.

5. Install horizontal backwater valves with cleanout cover flush with floor.6. Comply with requirements for backwater valves, cleanouts, and drains specified

in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.

E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.


1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.


A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Exposed ABS and PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.


3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and

coupled joints.3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

C. Aboveground, vent piping shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and

coupled joints.3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.2. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

END OF SECTION

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Cleanouts.2. Floor drains.3. Trench drains.4. Roof flashing assemblies.5. Through-penetration firestop assemblies.6. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.7. Flashing materials.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for storm drainage piping inside the building, drainage piping specialties, and drains.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

D. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

E. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for the following:1. Grease interceptors.


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that grease interceptors, grease removal devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Include the following:


a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.


1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.


1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS


1. Cultures: Provide 1-gal. bottles of bacteria culture recommended by manufacturer of FOG disposal systems equal to 200 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 2 1-gal. bottles.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts:

1. ASME A112.36.2M, Cast-Iron Cleanouts:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:

1) MIFAB, Inc2) Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.3) Wade4) Watts Drainage Products.5) Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal.

B. Metal Floor Cleanouts:

1. ASME A112.36.2M, Cast-Iron Cleanouts:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work includethe following:

1) MIFAB, INC2) Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.3) Tyler Pipe.4) Wade 5) Watts Drainage Products.









6) Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:a. MIFAB, Inc.b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.c. Wade d. Watts Drainage Products.e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.4. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch or Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe

test tee as required to match connected piping.5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, cast-iron plug.6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout

size.7. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with

screw.8. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-

installation frame and cover.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:


a. MIFAB, Inc.b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.c. Wade Div.d. Watts Drainage Products.e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group;

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.3. Body Material: Gray iron.4. Clamping Device: Required.5. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Acid-resistant enamel.6. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.7. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.











2.3 CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

A. Stainless-Steel Channel Drainage Systems:

1. ASME A112.3.1, Stainless-Steel Channel Drainage Systems:


1) MIFAB, Inc

2) Watts

3) Zurn Plumbing Products Group

2. Non-ASME A112.3.1, Stainless-Steel Channel Drainage Systems:


1) MIFAB, Inc

2) Watts3) Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

3. Type: Modular system of stainless-steel channel sections, grates, and appurtenances; designed so grates fit into channel recesses without rocking or rattling.

a. Standard: ASME A112.3.1, for trench drains.b. Channel Sections: Interlocking-joint, stainless-steel with level invert.c. Supports, Anchors, and Setting Devices: Manufacturer's standard, unless

otherwise indicated.d. Channel-Section Joining and Fastening Materials: As recommended by

system manufacturer.

4. Type: Modular system of stainless-steel channel sections, grates, and appurtenances; designed so grates fit into channel recesses without rocking or rattling.

a. Channel Sections: Interlocking-joint, stainless steel with level invert.

b. Grates: Manufacturer's designation "heavy duty," with slots or perforations, and of width and thickness that fit recesses in channels.

c. Show locations and lengths of covers on Drawings.d. Supports, Anchors, and Setting Devices: Manufacturer's standard, unless

otherwise indicated.e. Channel-Section Joining and Fastening Materials: As recommended by

system manufacturer.



2.4 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES

A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:


a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div.b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.

2. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.

a. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.b. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.c. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.

2.5 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:


a. 3M

b. Hilti

c. STI

2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.4. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral

nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with

neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug.

6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Open Drains:




1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

B. Deep-Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

a. NPS 2: 4-inch minimum water seal.b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch minimum water seal.

C. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.

D. Air-Gap Fittings:

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for

associated indirect waste piping.

E. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 2 inches above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.

2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

F. Stack Flashing Fittings:

1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

G. Vent Caps:

1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.


H. Frost-Resistant Vent Terminals:

1. Description: Manufactured or shop-fabricated assembly constructed of copper, lead-coated copper, or galvanized steel.

2. Design: To provide 1-inch enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension, with counterflashing.

I. Expansion Joints:

1. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M.2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.3. End Connections: Matching connected piping.4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.

2.7 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness.2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness.3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.

B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft. 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft.

C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum thickness.

E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install grease interceptors, grease removal devices, and solids interceptors on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s).

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet

for larger piping.4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor

drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater

than 1-inch total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

G. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.


H. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor penetrations.

I. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 2 inches above floor.

J. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

K. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

L. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.

M. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

N. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.

O. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

P. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance.

Q. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

R. Install grease interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing.

1. Above-Floor Installation: Set unit with bottom resting on floor, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Flush with Floor Installation: Set unit and extension, if required, with cover flush with finished floor.

3. Recessed Floor Installation: Set unit in receiver housing having bottom or cradle supports, with receiver housing cover flush with finished floor.

4. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral cleanout on outlet.

S. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.

T. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.


3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet to unit and connect flow-control fitting and vent to unit inlet piping. Install valve on outlet of automatic draw off-type unit.

D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.

2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.

G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.



A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION

ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223300 - 1

SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Commercial, light-duty, storage, electric, domestic-water heaters.2. Domestic-water heater accessories.


A. Seismic Performance: Commercial domestic-water heaters shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."


A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For commercial domestic-water heaters, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.


2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.


3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial and tankless, electric, domestic-water heater, from manufacturer.

C. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Source quality-control reports.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric, domestic-water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

C. ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of electric, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.b. Faulty operation of controls.c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Commercial, Light-Duty, Storage, Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Five years.2) Controls and Other Components: Three years.

b. Compression Tanks: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMMERCIAL, ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Commercial, Light-Duty, Storage, Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters:


a. Bradford White Corporation.b. Lochinvar Corporation.c. Rheem Manufacturing Company.d. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation.e. State Industries.

2. Standard: UL 174.3. Storage-Tank Construction: Steel, vertical arrangement.

a. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig .c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water

tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings.

4. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.b. Dip Tube: Required unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.c. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005.d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.f. Heat-Trap Fittings: Inlet type in cold-water inlet and outlet type in hot-water

outlet.g. Heating Elements: Two; electric, screw-in immersion type; wired for

simultaneous operation unless otherwise indicated. Limited to 12 kW total.







h. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.i. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.j. Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature-and-

pressure relief valves. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

5. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction with legs for off-floor installation.

2.2 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Domestic-Water Compression Tanks:


a. AMTROL Inc.b. Wesselsc. Zurn/Wilkens

2. Description: Steel pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.

3. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

B. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Comply with ANSI/CSA LC 3. Include dimensions not less than base of domestic-water heater, and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 with ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads or with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads.

C. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

D. Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE 90.2.

E. Pressure-Reducing Valves: ASSE 1003 for water. Set at 25-psig maximum outlet pressure unless otherwise indicated.

F. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting



less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

G. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating.

H. Vacuum Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

I. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.

J. Domestic-Water Heater Stands: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel stand for floor mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water. Include dimension that will support bottom of domestic-water heater a minimum of 18 inches above the floor.

K. Domestic-Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket for wall mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test commercial domestic-water heaters to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating before shipment.

C. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Commercial, Electric, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete bases as specified.

1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters if installation on stand, bracket, suspended platform, or directly on floor is indicated.

2. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.3. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise

indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.


5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

6. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

7. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

8. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

B. Install electric, domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping.

C. Install commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters with seismic-restraint devices.

D. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

E. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for electric, domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains.

F. Install thermometers on outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heaters.

G. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heater storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

H. Fill electric, domestic-water heaters with water.

I. Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to electric, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."



A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain, electric, domestic-water heaters.


COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS 224213 - 1

SECTION 224213 - COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Water closets.2. Flushometer valves.3. Toilet seats.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for water closets.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one of each type.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets: Floor mounted, floor outlet, close coupled (gravity tank), vitreous china.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following: List of manufacturers below is for gravity-tank, 1.6-gal./flush (6-L/flush) water closets.

a. American Standard America.b. Kohler Co.c. TOTO USA, INC.d. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.

2. Bowl:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, ASME A112.19.5, and ASSE 1037.

b. Height: Handicapped/elderly.c. Rim Contour: Elongatedd. Water Consumption: 1.28gpfe. Color: White

3. Supply Fittings:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.b. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube

matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange.c. Stop: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression

stop with inlet connection matching water-supply piping type and size.

1) Operation: Loose key.

d. Riser:

1) Size: NPS 1/2 2) Material: Chrome-plated, soft-copper flexible tube riser.

2.2 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats:


a. American Standard America.b. Bemis Manufacturing Company.c. Centoco Manufacturing Corporation.d. Church Seats.










e. Jones Stephens Corp.; Comfort Seat Brand.f. Kohler Co.g. TOTO USA, INC.h. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.

2. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5.3. Material: Plastic.4. Shape: Elongated rim, open front5. Hinge: Self-sustaining, check6. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal.7. Seat Cover: Not required.8. Color: White

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before water-closet installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where water closets will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Water-Closet Installation:

1. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.2. Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitting

attachments to piping or building substrate.3. Install accessible, wall-mounted water closets at mounting height for

handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets.

2. Use carrier supports with waste-fitting assembly and seal.3. Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor

substrate, onto waste-fitting seals; and attach to support.4. Install wall-mounted, back-outlet water-closet supports with waste-fitting

assembly and waste-fitting seals; and affix to building substrate.

C. Install toilet seats on water closets.

D. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:






1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons

for Plumbing Piping."

E. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to water-closet color.3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water closets with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match water closets.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning water closets, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.

C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.


A. Clean water closets and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of water closets for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION

COMMERCIAL URINALS 224214 - 1

SECTION 224214 - COMMERCIAL URINALS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Urinals.2. Flushometer valves.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for urinals.


B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one of each type.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL-HUNG URINALS

A. Urinals: Wall hung, back outlet, siphon jet, accessible.


a. American Standard America.b. Kohler Co.c. Zurn

2. Fixture:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.b. Material: Vitreous china.c. Type: Siphon jet.d. Strainer or Trapway: Manufacturer's standard strainer with integral trap.e. Water Consumption: Water saving.f. Spud Size and Location: NPS 3/4; top.g. Outlet Size and Location: NPS 2; back.

3. Waste Fitting:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2 for coupling.b. Size: NPS 2

4. Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include rectangular, steel uprights.

2.2 URINAL FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Solenoid-Actuator, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Coyne & Delany Co.b. Sloan Valve Company.c. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.

2. Standard: ASSE 1037.3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig 4. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device.5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.6. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated.







7. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel.8. Style: Exposed.9. Actuator: Solenoid complying with UL 1951; listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency; and marked for intended location and application.

10. Trip Mechanism: Battery-powered electronic sensor complying with UL 1951; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency; and marked for intended location and application.

11. Consumption: 1.0 gal. per flush.12. Minimum Inlet: NPS 3/4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before urinal installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where urinals will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Urinal Installation:

1. Install urinals level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.2. Install wall-hung, back-outlet urinals onto waste fitting seals and attached to

supports.3. Install wall-hung, bottom-outlet urinals with tubular waste piping attached to

supports.4. Install accessible, wall-mounted urinals at mounting height for the

handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.5. Install trap-seal liquid in waterless urinals.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung urinals.2. Use off-floor carriers with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet urinals.3. Use carriers without waste fitting for urinals with tubular waste piping.4. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible

urinals.

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve water-supply fitting on each supply to each urinal.2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.


3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible urinals with handle mounted on open side of compartment.

4. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.

D. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

E. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between urinals and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to urinal color.3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect urinals with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match urinals.



D. Where installing piping adjacent to urinals, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust urinals and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning urinals, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.



A. Clean urinals and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed urinals and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of urinals for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


END OF SECTION

COMMERCIAL SINKS 224216 - 1

SECTION 224216 - COMMERCIAL SINKS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Service basins.2. Sink faucets.3. Supply fittings.4. Waste fittings.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for sinks.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics[, electrical characteristics,] and furnished specialties and accessories.


A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.


A. Maintenance Data: For sinks to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size installed.


2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SERVICE SINKS

A. Service Basins: Terrazzo, floor mounted.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:a. Fiatb. Florestone Products Co., Inc.c. Stern-Williams Co., Inc.

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: IAPMO PS 99.b. Shape: Squarec. Nominal Size: 24 by 24 inches d. Height: 10 inchese. Rim Guard: On all top surfaces.f. Drain: Grid with NPS 3 outlet.

3. Mounting: On floor and flush to wall.

2.2 SINK FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Sink Faucets: Manual type, mixing valve.

1. Commercial, Solid-Brass Faucets.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:1) Chicago Faucets.2) Delta Faucet Company.3) T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.4) Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.3. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with

supplies, coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor.4. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.2 gpm (8.3 L/min.).5. Vacuum Breaker: Required for hose outlet.








6. Spout Outlet: Hose thread according to ASME B1.20.7

2.3 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Integral to faucet

2.4 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

2.5 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before sink installation.

B. Examine walls, floors, and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout.


C. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

D. Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.


A. After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION

COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES 224217 - 1

SECTION 224217 - COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Lavatories.2. Faucets.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.


B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring of automatic faucets.


A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Servicing and adjustments of automatic faucets.



A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VITREOUS-CHINA, COUNTER-MOUNTED LAVATORIES

A. Lavatory: self-rimming, vitreous china, counter mounted.


a. American Standard America.b. Kohler Co.c. Zurn

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1.b. Type: Self-rimming for above-counter mounting.c. Faucet-Hole Location: Top.d. Mounting Material: Sealant.

2.2 SOLID-BRASS, AUTOMATICALLY OPERATED LAVATORY FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Lavatory Faucets: Automatic-type, electronic-sensor-operated, solid-brass valve.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:a. Sloan Valve Company.b. TOTO USA, INC.c. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.

2. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and UL 1951.3. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.







4. General: Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

5. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass.6. Finish: Polished chrome plate.7. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm 8. Drain: Not part of faucet.

2.3 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Loose key or Wheel handle.

F. Risers:

1. NPS 1/2 (DN 15).2. ASME A112.18.6, braided, stainless-steel, flexible hose riser.

2.4 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/4 by NPS 1-1/4.2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, 17 gauge cast-brass trap and swivel elbow

and chrome-plated, brass or steel wall flange.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before lavatory installation.

B. Examine counters and walls for suitable conditions where lavatories will be installed.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people with disabilities or the elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

E. Seal joints between lavatories, counters, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

F. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust lavatories and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning lavatories, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.



A. After completing installation of lavatories, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.


C. Provide protective covering for installed lavatories and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of lavatories for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION

DRINKING FOUNTAINS 224713 - 1

SECTION 224713 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes drinking fountains and related components.


A. Product Data: For each type of drinking fountain.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Include operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


A. Maintenance Data: For drinking fountains to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DRINKING FOUNTAINS

A. Drinking Fountains: Wall mounted.

1. Stainless-Steel Drinking Fountains:


1) Elkay Manufacturing Co.2) Filtrine Manufacturing Company.3) Halsey Taylor.4) Haws Corporation.

2. Standards:






a. Comply with ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4.b. Comply with NSF 61.

3. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 tailpiece.4. Supply: NPS 3/8 with shutoff valve.5. Waste Fitting: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2, NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) chrome-plated

brass P-trap and waste.6. Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type III lavatory carrier.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Set pedestal drinking fountains on floor.

C. Install recessed drinking fountains secured to wood blocking in wall construction.

D. Install off-the-floor carrier supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures.

E. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to domestic-water distribution piping. Use ball valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

F. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage system.

G. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding fittings.

H. Seal joints between fixtures and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."


3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.


C. Install quarter turn ball shutoff valve on water supply to each fixture.

D. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After installing fixtures, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures.

D. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION

GENERAL PROVISIONS, MECHANICAL 230100 - 1

SECTION 230100 – GENERAL PROVISIONS, MECHANICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Materials, equipment, fabrication, installation, and tests in conformity with applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction for the following:

1. Mechanical work covered by all sections within DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL of these Specifications, including but not limited to:a. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and equipment.b. Plumbing systems and equipment.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. DIVISION 9 - FINISHES.

B. DIVISION 23 - MECHANICAL.

C. DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS, CODES, FEES AND UTILITY CONNECTION CHARGES

A. Local codes.

B. State Codes.

C. FM - Factory Mutual.

D. Federal Codes.

E. ASME Boiler Code.

F. AGA - American Gas Association.

G. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers.

H. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council.

I. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.

J. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

K. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association.

L. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.

M. ARI - Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.

N. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.


O. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act.

P. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.

Q. Contractor shall make arrangements with utility company(ies) for their services and metering work. Pay all charges therefor, and include the cost thereof in the contract price.


A. Furnish all equipment and specialties new and free from defects.

B. Products Criteria:

1. Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products. Items of equipment shall essentially duplicate equipment that has been in satisfactory use at least two years prior to bid opening. Provide list of users upon request.

2. Equipment having less than a two year use record, which in the opinion of the Engineer, provides significant benefits to the Owner such as improved energy efficiency, will be acceptable if it is a product of a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the manufacture of that specific type of product which has been used in similar applications for a period of two years. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit evidence to this effect for his approval.

3. Equipment Service: Products shall be supported by a service organization which maintains an adequate inventory of repair parts and is located, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, reasonably close to the site.

4. Multiple Units: When two or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.

5. Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product.

6. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.

A. Welding: Before any welding is performed submit a copy of the Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) together with the Procedure Qualification Record as required by Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

1. Before any welder performs any welding, submit a copy of the Manufacturer's Record of Welder or Welding Operator Qualification Tests as required by Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. The letter or symbol (as shown on the qualification test form) shall be used to identify the work of that welder and shall be affixed in accordance with appropriate construction code, to each completed weld.

2. The types and extent of non-destructive examinations required for pipe welds are shown in Table 136.4 of the Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI/ASME B31.1.


B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished for record to the Architect/Engineer prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations may be cause for rejection of the material.

C. When included, reflected ceiling plan drawings shall govern over mechanical and electrical drawings for location of ceiling-installed elements. Contractor to extend ductwork and conduit as required.

D. In addition to all requirements specified hereinafter, each material and equipment item shall have all features as standard with its manufacturer and/or required for the complete operational system.

E. Capacities, ratings, sizes, and other requirements not specified hereinafter shall be as scheduled or otherwise indicated on the drawings.

F. Should the Contractor at any time discover a discrepancy in the drawings or with respect to a variance of code requirements, he shall notify the Architect/Engineer for clarification and shall not proceed with the work affected until clarification has been made.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals and shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with these CONTRACT DOCUMENTS and in accordance with the following:

1. At a minimum provide an electronic copy of submittals in pdf format and at least one hard copy to maintain in the engineers office.

2. Submit shop drawings, manufacturers data and certificates for equipment, materials and finish, and pertinent details for each system where specified in each individual section, and have them approved before procurement, fabrication, or delivery of the items to the job site. Partial submittals will not be acceptable and will be returned without review. All equipment, material, and manufacturer's literature shall be submitted for approval at one time and in a tabulated binder. Control drawings and the controls equipment submittal may be submitted at a later time, but as soon as practical after the contract has been awarded and after the general equipment submittal has been made. However, every attempt shall be made to include the complete controls submittal with the general equipment submittal at one time.

3. The submittal shall include summary cover sheet(s) and manufacturer's literature under each tab of the submittal binder which together clearly indicate compliance or deviation from the specifications and drawings.

4. Submission material and all shop drawings shall be marked with the appropriate identification relating the equipment to the drawings. Mark and reference each item on the submittal summary sheet and the manufacturer's literature to the appropriate paragraph number in the specifications. Manufacturer's standard catalogs will not be accepted.

5. Failure to comply with the above for a complete and clear submittal may result in resubmittal.

B. Operating instructions and parts lists.


1. Before requesting acceptance of work, furnish the number of printed and hardback bound sets required.

2. Equipment and systems.a. Complete description of equipment and systems and basic operating

features.b. Manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, spare parts list, and

descriptive literature for all components3. Maintenance instructions.4. Listing of possible breakdown and repairs.5. Instruction for starting and operation.6. Detailed and simplified one line, color coded flow and wiring diagrams.7. Schedule of valve identification.

C. Field test report as required by Section 230593 - BALANCING AND TESTING BY INDEPENDENT AGENCY.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Examine related work and surfaces before starting work of any section.

1. Report in writing, conditions which will prevent proper provision of this work.2. Installed work which interferes with architectural or any other work, or which

deviates from drawings and specifications without prior approval, shall be altered by contractor, without cost to Owner, to clear such interferences, or to comply with the drawings and specifications. Interferences or discrepancies which may be discovered or anticipated shall be reported promptly. Architect/Engineer shall have privilege of making minor changes without additional cost, provided that such changes are made before commencing work on items involved.

B. Continuity of Services and Connections to Existing Work:1. At no additional cost to Owner, provide all necessary temporary connections and

temporary facilities to accomplish the required continuity of services and existing operations.

2. Arrange all work to interfere as little as possible with the normal existing operations. Do not interrupt any existing utility or other service or existing operation at any time without Owner's prior approval. After each interruption has been made, make all necessary connections and alterations, and restore services and avoid interferences with normal existing operations as quickly as possible.

3. Install new work and connect to existing work with minimum interference to existing facilities and maintain water and air tightness when applicable.

4. Temporary shutdowns of existing services:a. At no additional charges.b. At times not to interfere with normal operation of existing facilities.c. Only with written consent of Owner.

5. Maintain continuous operation of existing facilities as required with necessary temporary connections between new and existing work.

6. Connect new work to existing work in neat and satisfactory high quality workmanship manner.

7. Restore existing disturbed work to original or better conditions.

1.7 ACCURACY OF DATA AND DRAWINGS


A. Drawings are generally diagrammatic, and where not dimensioned or detailed, indicated approximate locations of work. Examine carefully existing buildings and structures, existing systems, and all other contract drawings, and install work to conform as nearly as possible to locations and arrangements indicated, with only such minor adjustments as necessary to coordinate mechanical work with other work, and to avoid interferences therewith. All piping and ductwork, offsets, rises, and fittings are not necessarily shown; however, provide these as required by the conditions involved.

B. Building and structure dimensions: TAKE THESE FROM ARCHITECTURAL AND FROM ACTUAL MEASUREMENTS OF EACH EXISTING BUILDING AND EACH EXISTING STRUCTURE INVOLVED.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Carefully examine the architectural, electrical, heating and air-conditioning, plumbing, fire protection, structural, and site plan drawings and specifications, and coordinate this work among trades to avoid delay.

B. In general, permanent openings or knockout panels are provided to permit only future service or replacement of system components, not the entire assembly. The Contractor shall coordinate his equipment delivery with construction progress so that installation may be made in an orderly manner.

C. The structural design is based on installed locations of the equipment only. Any necessary shoring or other protection necessary for moving heavy equipment to installed location is the responsibility of the Contractor. Take extra precautions in using any existing structure for hoisting or temporary support.

D. Wherever piping, conduits, ducts, or other items are to run in the same general direction, elevation, or location, coordinate for the proper allocation of the space position. If necessary, consult the Architect/Engineer, whose decision shall be final.

E. Wherever work is to be concealed or installed above ceilings, maintain adequate clearance to allow for access, repairs, and removal of all devices.

F. Coordinate setting of sleeves, anchor bolts, and inserts as required to accommodate equipment before concrete is set and masonry is placed.

1.9 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS, MOTORS, MOTOR STARTERS, CONTROLS, AND WIRING

A. Electrical Characteristics: Refer to electrical section for electrical characteristics of motors specified or scheduled under the Mechanical Section.

B. Motor Sizes: Motor horsepowers specified in Mechanical Section and/or indicated on mechanical drawings are approximate, and are not intended to limit motor sizes. Each motor shall be of proper size to operate continuously the actual equipment driven thereby, without overload on motor under all operating conditions, except as otherwise specified.

C. Motor starters and other electrical control devices: Generally, motor starters for equipment motors shall be furnished by contractor. Also, provide electrical control devices required for the Mechanical system, unless otherwise specified.


D. All motor starters shall comply with specifications for motor starters as specified in DIVISION 26.

E. In addition to the items specified in DIVISION 26, starters that operate in parallel with other starters shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts on the main disconnectfor breaking one leg of the control power. In these cases, the secondaries of the starter transformers shall be properly phased.

F. Installation of electrical devices, EXCEPT those factory mounted on equipment: electrical control devices which require electrical connections ONLY, shall be installed by contractor; electrical control devices which required piping, linkage, remote bulb, or other mechanical connections IN ADDITION TO electrical connections, shall be installed by contractor, ready for electrical connections. Electric wiring: All electric wiring required to operate the mechanical systems, EXCEPT wiring which is factory installed on equipment, shall be done by contractor, in accordance with approved wiring diagrams which shall be furnished by this Section.

G. Install name plates with full data on all motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

1.10 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Pay all transportation and handling charges. Immediately report any damage to equipment received to the carrier so that job progress will not be delayed.

B. All items received by the Contractor shall be left in their original containers, or as shipped, where possible, until installed in final locations.

C. All items shall be protected from the elements. If stored outside, provide blocking to raise the base of each item well above ground and/or water levels.

D. Provide additional protection for items subject to damage, where necessary, so that when installed, the items will be in new condition.

E. Supply electrical items that might be damaged by condensation with heated air in an enclosed area until placed into service.

1.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Execute cutting (including excavating), fitting, and patching of work required to:

1. Make several parts fit properly.2. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill timed work.3. Remove defective work.4. Remove work not complying with the requirements of the contract documents.5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.6. Where work is cut for any reason, restore cut and damaged areas with new

materials meeting requirements of the contract documents.

B. In addition to the requirements above and upon written instructions of the Architect/ Engineer, provide cutting, fitting, and patching to:

1. Uncover work to provide observation of covered work.2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing.


C. Do not endanger work by cutting or altering work or any part of it.

D. Prior to cutting that affects structural safety of project, submit written notice to Architect/Engineer requesting consent to proceed with cutting, including:

1. Identification of project.2. Description of affected work.3. Necessity for cutting.4. Affect on other work and on structural integrity of project.5. Description of proposed work. Designate scope of cutting and patching, trades

to execute work, products proposed to be used, and extent of refinishing.6. Alternatives to cutting and patching.7. Designation of party responsible for cost of cutting and patching.

E. Prior to cutting and patching done on the instruction of the Architect/Engineer, submit cost estimate.

F. Should conditions of work or schedule indicate the need for change of materials or methods, submit written recommendations Architect/Engineer, including conditions indicating the need for change, recommendations for alternative materials or methods, submittals as required for substitution of materials, and cost estimate for changing materials or methods.

G. Submit written notice designating time work will be uncovered to provide for observation.

H. Costs caused by ill timed or defective work and work not complying with requirements of the contract documents, including costs of additional services of Architect/Engineer, shall be borne by the party responsible for the ill timed, defective, or non-complying work.

1.12 INSTRUCTION TO OWNER/OPERATING PERSONNEL

A. The Contractor shall furnish the services of factory trained instructors who will give full instruction to the designated personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the equipment or system specified. The instruction will be for 8 hours. Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Instruction shall be given after the equipment or system has been accepted for regular operation. When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, additional instruction shall be provided to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes or modifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, SUBSTITUTIONS, AND PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Manufacturers or Trade Names:


The use of manufacturer's names and catalog numbers in these specifications or on the drawings indicates the type, size, rating, capacity, design, quality, or kind of materials required, and a closed specification is not intended, and similar and equal products of any reputable manufacturer which will satisfactorily perform the required functions will be acceptable, unless otherwise indicated by the words NO SUBSTITUTES, or unless otherwise specifically stated. The Architect/Engineer reserves the right to reject all materials which he deems not equal to those specified, or which he decides will not satisfactorily perform the required functions.

1. Any manufacturer providing equipment for this project shall provide a written guarantee to the Contractor stipulating that any parts used in the equipment so provided will be readily available for a minimum of ten years from date of shipment from the factory. The Contractor shall, in turn, provide the Owner with these guarantees in the brochures submitted covering all the equipment used.

2.2 VALVE TAG IDENTIFICATION

A. Minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.

B. Brass or aluminum.

C. Identifying numbers and letters shall be stamped 1/4 inch (minimum) height.

D. Fasten to valve with 18 (minimum) gauge solid copper or galvanized steel wire.

2.3 NAME PLATE IDENTIFICATION

A. Four by two inch (minimum) size engraved and laminated plastic nameplate or black lamicoid sheet with white lettering.

2.4 PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. Brady B-500 or equal self-sticking vinyl cloth markers and pipe marker arrows.

2.5 MOTORS

A. All motors 10 hp and larger shall be high efficiency motors in accordance with NEMA MA-1-12.53b and IEEE 112A, Test Method B, with guaranteed minimum efficiency of 88.5 percent, an across-the-line minimum power factor of 85 percent (for synchronous speeds of 1,800 and 3,600 rpm), and a service factor of 1.15.

B. Every electric motor shall comply with NEMA Standard and be sized and designed to operate continuously at full load and full speed without causing noise, vibration, or temperature rise in excess of its rating.


Motors on belt drive equipment shall be furnished with apparatus for belt tension adjustment slide rails, idler pulley, or similar. Motors shall be of sufficient size for the duty to be performed and shall not exceed the motor's full rated load when the driven equipment is operating at specified capacity under the most severe conditions likely to be encountered. Insulation shall be Class F with Class B rise and moisture, fungus, and oil resistant treatment and shall be of a type designed and constructed to withstand the severe moisture conditions and the wide range of ambient temperature to which the motors will be subjected. Unless otherwise specified, all motors shall have open drip-proof frames and shall be rated for continuous full load operation without exceeding the standard temperature rise permitted for the frame construction and class of insulation used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FIELD TESTS

A. All piping shall be free of leaks, and test gauges shall show no loss of pressure for at least 30 minutes after source of test pressure has been cut off, or as noted. Pipes may be tested in sections as the work progresses. Repair and retest all sections failing to pass tests, as required to obtain approval of tests. No caulking, welding, or brazing will be permitted on threaded pipe or fittings to stop leaks. Replace with new material all cracked or otherwise defective pipe and fittings of all types, as approved. Furnish suitable testing equipment, give all applicable authorities ample advance notice of all proposed tests and readiness of work for inspections, and advance notice of all proposed tests and readiness of work for inspections, and conduct each test in their presence, as approved. Do not conceal or insulate piping and do not conceal ductwork until all inspections have been made and all required tests have been approved by all applicable authorities. Submit results for review.

B. Provide required labor, material, equipment, and connections.

C. Test all piping, EXCEPT as otherwise specified below, as follows: hydrostatic test, at 150 percent of normal operating pressure of piping involved, or 100 psi, whichever is higher, AFTER removing all air from piping involved in test.

1. Natural gas and fuel oil piping: 50 psi test using air or inert gas.2. Soil, waste, vent, roof drainage, and acid waste piping: standard water test, by

filling piping with water up to top of vent stack or highest point of piping test section involved, but no section tested with less than a ten foot head with no pressure loss for at least 30 minutes.

3. Compressed air: air test at 150 percent of normal working pressure of piping involved, or 100 psi, whichever is higher.

4. Test all equipment in accordance with sections specified hereinafter.

D. Test all ductwork in accordance with leakage test method recommended in latest edition of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible". After remedying audible leaks, total leakage on system shall not exceed one percent of system total design air flow rate.


A. Flush or blow all welding slag, pipe joint compound, loose scale, and other debris from pipework before connecting equipment thereto.


After systems have been tested and before any field painting is commenced, clean up all work thoroughly. Remove all foreign matter which has accumulated in ducts, casings, enclosures, fixtures, and equipment. Clean and polish all valves, plates, and other surfaces that are not to be painted, so that they present a new and acceptable appearance. Put systems in operation, test all fixtures and other equipment, remedy all leaks and defects, make all necessary adjustments, and remove all air from water circulating systems. Adjust all air and water flows to indicated and/or required quantities, and adjust all controls and other items as required to balance system and provide uniform air flows and uniform temperatures in air conditioned areas. Demonstrate that all controls and mechanical equipment function satisfactorily, as specified, as indicated, and as approved.

B. Strainers and Dirt Pockets: Clean out each of these; REMOVE EACH STRAINER SCREEN FOR CLEANING.

C. Circulating Water Systems: Completely drain each of these, and refill with clean water.

D. After systems have been tested and before putting any part of or the entire system in operation for Owner's beneficial use, insure that all necessary adjustments have been made.

1. Bearings and other items requiring lubrication, except factory permanently lubricated type: lubricate each of these as recommended by its manufacturer; this includes lubricated type plug valves.

2. Belts: adjust each of these to proper tension.3. Filters: replace each disposable ("throw-away") filter with a new clean filter

(except blanket roll and high efficiency type). Clean each cleanable filter. NOTE: ALL FILTERS SHALL BE IN PLACE DURING TESTING AND ADJUSTING.

4. Motor load tests: make an ammeter check of actual running current of each motor in mechanical system under operating conditions. Correct all motors which are found to be overloaded, as approved.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment rooms and other areas in which equipment is to be installed have limiting dimensions. Install all mechanical work within these areas substantially as indicated, with ample unobstructed access space around each piece of equipment to facilitate proper installation, operation, and maintenance of equipment, and to allow ample space for plumbing, electrical, and other equipment indicated to be installed therein. Minor revisions in layout may be made subject to approval, but major changes in layout to accommodate proposed equipment which differs substantially from specified equipment in size and arrangement may not be considered or will be subjected to the provisions of paragraph 2.1 C. hereinbefore. Each bidder shall determine before bidding that equipment upon which he proposes to base his bid will conform to these requirements. Install each equipment item in accordance with its manufacturer's recommendations, and as indicated on the drawings, and/or specified. If the drawings and/or specifications conflict with the manufacturer's recommendations, report this to the Architect/Engineer for his decision before proceeding with the work involved.

B. Generally, install pipework and ductwork as follows unless otherwise indicated.


1. Finished areas: conceal pipework and ductwork within pipe chases, above suspended ceiling, and within other building construction, and other finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.Unfinished areas: install aboveground pipework and ductwork exposed in areas where pipe chases or suspended ceilings are not indicated or concealing is otherwise impracticable, in mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, manufacturing areas, warehouse, or storage areas, and other unfinished areas.

2. ALL areas: install pipework and ductwork parallel or at right angles with beams, walls, ceilings, and other building lines, in straight lines between required direction changes, with vertical runs plumb. Install exposed pipework and ductwork as close as practicable to walls, columns, ceilings, and overhead construction, and to provide maximum headroom and minimum interference with usable building space.

3.4 REMOVAL AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING WORK

A. Disconnect, remove or relocate material, equipment, piping, and other work as required for installation of new systems shown on drawings.

B. Provide new material and equipment related for relocated equipment.

C. Plug or cap and seal active existing piping or ductwork behind or below finish.

D. Do not leave long dead end branches:

1. Cap or plug as close to active line as possible.

E. Salvaged Existing Mechanical Materials and Equipment: Promptly haul away from Owner's premises all materials and equipment which are removed from existing system and are neither indicated nor required to be reused in the completed project, EXCEPT as otherwise specified. Owner may select certain removed existing materials and equipment and retain them for his future use. Before removing any existing materials and equipment, determine from Owner which of these materials and equipment he desires to retain. Remove all Owner selected materials and equipment without unnecessary damage thereto, and safely store them at locations designated by Owner.


A. Inspect existing conditions of work, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting and patching and excavating and backfilling.

B. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new products.

C. Provide shoring, bracing, and support required to maintain structural integrity of the project.

D. Provide protection for other portions of the project.

E. Provide protection from the elements.

F. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply with specified tolerances and finishes.


G. Execute cutting and demolition by methods that prevent damage to other work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs and new work.

H. Refinish the entire surfaces where cutting and patching work occurs to provide an even, continuous surface to the nearest intersections. Where assemblies are damaged by cutting and patching, refinish entire assemblies.

3.6 PAINTING

A. All equipment shall be factory prime coated and painted, however, the following may be shop prime coated and made ready for painting:

1. Tanks.2. Structural supports and frames.

B. Uncoated Hangers, Supports, Rods, and inserts shall be prime coated.

C. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Interior insulated piping: Use two coats of semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Paint to match the existing.

2. Interior or Exterior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer. Paint to match existing.

3. Exterior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over galvanized metal primer.

4. Exterior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer.

D. Paint piping specialties to match piping.

E. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

F. Marred surfaces of prime coated or factory painted surfaces shall be painted and/or primed to match adjacent coat.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify valves, (including main pipe sectionalizing valves and branch valves) except those on or within hand reach of equipment controlled thereby with a minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter round brass or aluminum tag stamped with 1/4 inch (minimum) height letters designating material controlled by valve, and attached to valve body with 18 (minimum) gauge solid copper or galvanized steel wire. Submit a typed valve identification schedule with the operating instructions and parts list submittal described above under 1.5 SUBMITTALS.


B. Identify piping and ductwork with Brady B-500 or equal self-sticking vinyl cloth pipe markers and pipe marker arrows, each sized as recommended by marker manufacturer for outside diameter of pipe (including pipe insulation) labeled therewith. Marker background colors shall conform to OSHA and ANSI pipe identification standards. Each pipe marker shall be lettered to indicate the material contained in the pipeline involved, and arrows shall indicate direction of material flow in the pipelines. Install appropriate pipe markers, each with a marker arrow adjacent thereto, on all above ground pipelines on 20 foot maximum centers, with at least one marker and arrow in each vertical run between floor and ceiling.

C. Equipment: Label each major mechanical equipment item (such as AHU, pump, fan, condensing unit, boiler, water heaters, etc.) with nameplate engraved with equipment designation and number, and securely attached to equipment.

END OF SECTION

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230500 - 1

SECTION 23 05 00 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other Division 23 Sections.1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping

systems.2. Concrete base construction requirements.3. Dielectric fittings.4. Flexible connectors.5. Mechanical sleeve seals.6. Equipment nameplate data requirements.7. Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment is specified in

Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification."8. Nonshrink grout for equipment installations.9. Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports.10. Installation requirements common to equipment specification sections.11. Cutting and patching.12. Painting and finishing.

B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 23 piping system Sections.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Construction Agreement and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from


physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:1. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.2. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals and shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Division 1 - SUBMITTALS.

B. Product Data: For dielectric fittings, flexible connectors, mechanical sleeve seals, and identification materials and devices.

C. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorage for mechanical materials and equipment.

D. Coordination Drawings: For access panel and door locations.


A. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

B. Equipment Selection: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are increased. Additional costs shall be approved in advance by appropriate Contract Modification for these increases. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified, equipment must meet design and commissioning requirements.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent


entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.

C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.

D. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components.

B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations.

C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning before closing in building.

E. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Dielectric Unions:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.b. Central Plastics Co.c. Eclipse, Inc.; Rockford-Eclipse Div.d. Epco Sales Inc.e. Hart Industries International, Inc.f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

2. Dielectric Flanges:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.b. Central Plastics Co.c. Epco Sales Inc.d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

3. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:a. Calpico, Inc.b. Central Plastics Co.

4. Dielectric Couplings:a. Calpico, Inc.b. Lochinvar Corp.

5. Dielectric Nipples:a. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.b. Perfection Corp.c. Victaulic Co. of America.

6. Metal, Flexible Connectors:a. ANIMATE Industrial, Inc.b. Central Sprink, Inc.c. Flexicraft Industries.d. Flex-Weld, Inc.e. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.g. McWane, Inc.; Tyler Pipe; Gustin-Bacon Div.h. Mercer Rubber Co.i. Metraflex Co.j. Proco Products, Inc.k. Uniflex, Inc.

7. Mechanical Sleeve Seals:a. Calpico, Inc.b. Metraflex Co.c. Thunderline/Link-Seal.

2.2 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.


1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness, unless thickness or specific material is indicated.a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze

flanges.b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel

flanges.2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise

indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32.1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent

silver, with0.10 percent lead content.

2. Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.

3. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.

4. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.

5. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum lead content.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.1. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys.2. BAg1: Silver alloy.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvent cements for the following:1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

I. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket.

J. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon-steel bolts and nuts.

K. Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain-end, pressure pipes.1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.2. Followers: ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M) malleable iron or ASTM A 536

ductile iron.


3. Gaskets: Rubber.4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.5. Finish: Enamel paint.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.

B. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld-neck end types and matching piping system materials.

C. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

D. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C).

E. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly, full-face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.1. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or

300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

G. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).

H. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).

2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible pipe connections. Include 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working-pressure rating, unless higher working pressure is indicated, and ends according to the following:1. 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Threaded.2. 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: Flanged.3. Option for 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: Grooved for use with keyed

couplings.


B. Bronze-Hose, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze, inner tubing covered with bronze wire braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze welded to hose.

2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates.

2.7 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness, galvanized,

round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain

ends.3. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure

pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 GROUT

A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement

grout, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 3000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise.Individual Division 23 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements.

B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.


C. Install piping at indicated slope.

D. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and service areas.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch (25-mm) clearance around insulation.

J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.

K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes.

N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by PE removable sleeves.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6-inch NPS (DN150).b. Steel, Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6-inch NPS (DN150) and

larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions.3. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants.4. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone


sealant, unless otherwise indicated.Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves

and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter and

larger.3. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping materials. Refer to Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for materials.

S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

U. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual piping specification Sections:1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel

pipe.2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and

fittings before assembly.3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Soldering Manual,"

Chapter "The Soldering of Pipe and Tube"; or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube."

5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:a. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity

of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.

b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry seal threading is specified.

c. Align threads at point of assembly.d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe

is being threaded.e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are

corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, "Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe," using


qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench.

8. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners,

primers, and solvent cements.b. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661.c. CPVC Piping: ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493d. PVC Pressure Piping: ASTM D 2672.e. PVC Nonpressure Piping: ASTM D 2855.f. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Procedure and

solvent cement according to ASTM D 3138.9. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping

with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657 procedures and manufacturer's written instructions.a. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.b. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

V. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:1. Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, adjacent to each

valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS (DN50) or smaller threaded pipe connection.

2. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to Architect.

C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building


systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

E. Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope.

F. Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts if possible.

3.3 PAINTING AND FINISHING

A. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:1. Interior insulated piping: Use two coats of semi-gloss, acrylic-enamel finish.

Paint to match the existing.2. Interior or Exterior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish.

Include two finish coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer. Paint to match existing.

3. Exterior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over galvanized metal primer.

4. Exterior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats over rust-inhibitive metal primer.

B. Paint piping specialties to match piping.

C. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 5000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified on the structural drawings.

3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.


B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."


A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.

3.7 GROUTING

A. Install nonmetallic, nonshrink, grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 1

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.2. Trapeze pipe hangers.3. Fiberglass pipe hangers.4. Metal framing systems.5. Fiberglass strut systems.6. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.7. Fastener systems.8. Pipe stands.9. Equipment supports.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Section 230516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for pipe guides and anchors.

3. Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" 4. Metal Ducts for duct hangers and supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.


1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.




A. Welding certificates.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion

to support bearing surface of piping.5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel .

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following :

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.c. Flex-Strut Inc.d. GS Metals Corp.e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.f. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: MFMA-4.4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into

channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following

1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.2. Clement Support Services.3. ERICO International Corporation.4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.5. PHS Industries, Inc.6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc.7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.9. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig (688-kPa) minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psig (688-kPa minimum compressive strength.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.


















2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, [zinc-coated] [stainless-] steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:


1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

M. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.



3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.


4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick.

b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and

0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and

0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thick.e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and

0.105 inch (2.67 mm) thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.


3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and

so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40 mm)

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:1. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension

of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36 (DN 20 to DN 900), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.

2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 (DN 15 to DN 600) if little or no insulation is required.

3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 15 to DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

4. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).


5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).

6. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.

7. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

8. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

9. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900) if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

E. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 24 to DN 600).

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600) if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

F. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various

types of building attachments.5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232

deg C) piping installations.

G. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.


7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads.10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from

above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is

required.15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to

linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

H. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

I. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.


8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze

member.

J. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

K. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

END OF SECTION

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 - 1

SECTION 230553 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This Section includes mechanical identification materials and devices.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Construction Agreement and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals and shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - SUBMITTALS.

B. Product Data: For identification materials and devices.


A. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS

A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 23 Sections. If more than single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.


B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or stamped.1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity,

operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.

2. Location: Accessible and visible.

C. Snap-On Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap-on type.Include color-coding according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color-coded, pressure-sensitive, vinyl type with permanent adhesive.

E. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (150 mm): Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.

F. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches (150 mm) and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, at least 3 times letter height and of length required for label.

G. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length.1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to

accommodate both directions, or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

H. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, vinyl tape, at least 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick.1. Width: 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) on pipes with OD, including insulation, less

than 6 inches (150 mm); 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) for larger pipes.2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6-mm) letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) sequenced numbers. Include 5/32-inch (4-mm) hole for fastener.1. Material: 3/32-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick plastic laminate with 2 black surfaces

and a white inner layer.2. Material: Valve manufacturer's standard solid plastic.3. Size: 1-1/2-inches (40-mm) diameter, unless otherwise indicated.4. Shape: As indicated for each piping system.

J. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link or beaded chain; or brass S-hooks.

K. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link chain; beaded chain; or S-hooks.

L. Access Panel Markers: 1/16-inch- (2-mm-) thick, engraved plastic-laminate markers, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve.


Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) center hole for attachment.

M. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening.1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match

equipment identification.2. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent

adhesive.

N. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color codes:1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above.5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME

A13.1.6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following:

a. Name and plan number.b. Equipment service.c. Design capacity.d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving

conditions, and speed.7. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches (65 by 100 mm) for control devices, dampers,

and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches (115 by 150 mm) for equipment.

O. Plasticized Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with mat finish suitable for writing.1. Size: 3-1/4 by 5-5/8 inches (85 by 145 mm).3 Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire.4 Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or

DO NOT OPERATE.

P. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechanical identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters, and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple

systems of same name are indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING A N D D U C T SYSTEMS


A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.

B. Marker Type: Stenciled markers complying with ASME A13.1.

C. Marker Type: Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot, noninsulated pipes.

D. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) OD by one of following methods:1. Snap-on application of pretensioned, semirigid plastic pipe marker.2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap.3. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe or insulation.4. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less

than 3/4 inch (20 mm) wide, lapped a minimum of 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

E. Fasten markers on pipes and ducts 6 inches and larger by one of following methods:1. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe or insulation.2. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less

than 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) wide, lapped a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

3. Strapped to pipe or insulation with manufacturer's standard stainless-steel bands.

F. Locate markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations according to the following:1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and

terminal units.Mark each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or nonaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.6. Spaced at a maximum of 50-foot (15-m) intervals along each run. Reduce

intervals to 25 feet (7.5 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment.7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit

intermediately spaced markers.

3.2 VALVE TAGS

A. Install on control valves and control devices in piping systems.

B. Valve Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, color scheme, and with captions similar to those indicated in the following:


C. Tag Material: Brass.

D. Tag Size and Shape: According to the following:1. Cold Water: 2 inches (50 mm), round.

E. Tag Color: According to the following:1. Cold Water: Blue.

F. Letter Color: According to the following:1. Cold Water: White.

G. Install mounted valve schedule in each major equipment room.

3.3 EQUIPMENT SIGNS AND MARKERS

A. Install engraved plastic-laminate signs or equipment markers on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:1. Pumps, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.2. Heat exchangers, cooling towers, and similar equipment.3. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.4. Water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.

B. Plasticized Tags: Install within concealed space, to reduce amount of text in exposed sign outside concealment, if equipment to be identified is concealed above acoustical ceiling or similar concealment.1. Identify operational valves and similar minor equipment items located in

unoccupied spaces, including machine rooms, by installing plasticized tags.


A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions.

B. Clean faces of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts.

END OF SECTION

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.


A. Qualification Data: submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Certified TAB reports.

C. Sample report forms.

D. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.2. Serial number.3. Application.4. Dates of use.5. Dates of calibration.



A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB

B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

C. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."

D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."

E. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."


A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.


B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations.

L. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

M. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

N. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required

and access to balancing devices is provided.7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations

can be met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section.

1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation," Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.


C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.


4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.

6. Obtain approval from Engineer for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.

7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point airflow with the remainder at maximum-airflow condition until the total airflow


of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.

B. Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load.

2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses.

3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver

the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.

a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.

8. Record final fan-performance data.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.2. Motor horsepower rating.3. Motor rpm.4. Efficiency rating.5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.


B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.

B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

C. Record compressor data.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature.2. Water flow rate.3. Water pressure drop.4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.6. Airflow.7. Air pressure drop.

B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil:

1. Nameplate data.2. Airflow.3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load.4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental

stage.5. Calculated kilowatt at full load.6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.

C. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each steam coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.2. Airflow.3. Air pressure drop.4. Inlet steam pressure.

D. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.3. Airflow.4. Air pressure drop.5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.


3.10 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent

3.11 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

3.12 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.2. Fan curves.3. Manufacturers' test data.4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop

Drawings and product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.3. Project name.4. Project location.5. Architect's name and address.6. Engineer's name and address.7. Contractor's name and address.8. Report date.9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the

report. Number each page in the report.11. Summary of contents including the following:


a. Indicated versus final performance.b. Notable characteristics of systems.c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated

values.15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.b. Conditions of filters.c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch

diameter.f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.2. Water and steam flow rates.3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.5. Terminal units.6. Balancing stations.7. Position of balancing devices.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.b. Location.c. Make and type.d. Model number and unit size.e. Manufacturer's serial number.f. Unit arrangement and class.g. Discharge arrangement.h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in

inches (mm).j. Number, make, and size of belts.k. Number, type, and size of filters.

2. Motor Data:


a. Motor make, and frame type and size.b. Horsepower and rpm.c. Volts, phase, and hertz.d. Full-load amperage and service factor.e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in

inches (mm).

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total air flow rate in cfm (L/s).b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).c. Fan rpm.d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).i. Outdoor airflow in cfm (L/s).j. Return airflow in cfm (L/s).k. Outdoor-air damper position.l. Return-air damper position.m. Vortex damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification.b. Location.c. Coil type.d. Number of rows.e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm) o.c.f. Make and model number.g. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).h. Tube size in NPS (DN).i. Tube and fin materials.j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s).b. Average face velocity in fpm (m/s).c. Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa).d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).h. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).j. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).


k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig (kPa).n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F (deg C).o. Inlet steam pressure in psig (kPa).

G. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System identification.b. Location.c. Make and type.d. Model number and unit size.e. Manufacturer's serial number.f. Fuel type in input data.g. Output capacity in Btu/h (kW).h. Ignition type.i. Burner-control types.j. Motor horsepower and rpm.k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.m. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.n. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in

inches (mm).


a. Total air flow rate in cfm (L/s).b. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C).c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).d. Air temperature differential in deg F (deg C).e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa).f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa).g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).h. Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h (kW).i. High-fire fuel input in Btu/h (kW).j. Manifold pressure in psig (kPa).k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F (deg C).l. Operating set point in Btu/h (kW).m. Motor voltage at each connection.n. Motor amperage for each phase.o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h (kW).

H. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in central-station air-handling units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System identification.


b. Location.c. Coil identification.d. Capacity in Btu/h (kW).e. Number of stages.f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz.g. Rated amperage.h. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s).i. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).j. Minimum face velocity in fpm (m/s).


a. Heat output in Btu/h (kW).b. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s).c. Air velocity in fpm (m/s).d. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C).e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).f. Voltage at each connection.g. Amperage for each phase.

I. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification.b. Location.c. Make and type.d. Model number and size.e. Manufacturer's serial number.f. Arrangement and class.g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in

inches (mm).

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.b. Horsepower and rpm.c. Volts, phase, and hertz.d. Full-load amperage and service factor.e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in

inches (mm).g. Number, make, and size of belts.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).c. Fan rpm.d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).


e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

J. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number.b. Location and zone.c. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C).d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).e. Duct size in inches (mm).f. Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m).g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm (L/s).h. Indicated velocity in fpm (m/s).i. Actual air flow rate in cfm (L/s).j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s).k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).

K. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.b. Location and zone.c. Apparatus used for test.d. Area served.e. Make.f. Number from system diagram.g. Type and model number.h. Size.i. Effective area in sq. ft. (sq. m).


a. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s).b. Air velocity in fpm (m/s).c. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm (L/s).d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s).e. Final air flow rate in cfm (L/s).f. Final velocity in fpm (m/s).g. Space temperature in deg F (deg C).

L. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit identification.b. Location and zone.c. Room or riser served.


d. Coil make and size.e. Flowmeter type.


a. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s).b. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C).c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).

M. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.b. Serial number.c. Application.d. Dates of use.e. Dates of calibration.

2. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

N. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows:

1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.

O. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION

DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 1

SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor/Outdoor supply, return, exhaust and outdoor air.


1. Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation."2. Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."3. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and


adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.


D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, [Type I] [Type II with factory-applied vinyl jacket] [Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket] [Type III with factory-applied FSP jacket]. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following] [provide one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.b. Johns Manville; Microlite.c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.e. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.

.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements provide one of the following

a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127.Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.

b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-03/11-70.Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.


C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-82.

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B.

Fuller Company; 85-50.Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=3063&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456825837&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd




















2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.4 JACKETS

A. Insulation system indicate with factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

5. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms (0.86 metric perm) when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.


B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material

as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches (50 mm o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.


L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall


3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm).

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm).

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:


1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), place pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend

parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface


to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches (450 mm) o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), space pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend

parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-


barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-

mm-) wide joint strips at end joints.5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed

insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.

B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.

3.7 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.

B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.

C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."


3.8 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below"

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.

3.9 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. All Supply return, and Outside air ducts.2. Exhaust ductwork connected to energy recovery unit.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts.2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.5. Flexible connectors.6. Vibration-control devices.7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.10 DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed ductwork:1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm)

B. Exposed ductwork. 1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches (50 mm

END OF SECTION

LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK 233100 - 1

SECTION 233100 - LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK

1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Ductwork

B. Fasteners

C. Sealants

D. Duct Cleaning


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists: Industrial Ventilation.

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, ASHRAE:1. ASHRAE Handbook and Product Directory.

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc., SMACNA:1. SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards - metal and Flexible.

1.4 Definitions

A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions.

B. Low Pressure: Static pressure in duct less than 2 inch w.g. and velocities less than 2,000 FPM.

1.5 SUBMITTAL

A. Submit in accordance with fabrication Division 1.

B. Provide shop drawings drawn to scale coordinated with existing conditions for all new stainless steel duct systems prior to fabricating of duct work to engineer.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. National Electrical Code, NEC (1987):1. NEC 300-21: Wiring Methods: Spread of Fire or Products of Combustion.


B. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA:1. NFPA 90A: Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.2. NFPA 90B: Standard for Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning

Systems.3. NFPA 96: Standard for Installation of Equipment for Removal of Smoke and

Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooling Equipment.

C. Underwriters Laboratories, UL:1. UL 181: Factory-Made Duct Materials and Air Duct Connections.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect shop-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling.1. Stored materials subject to rejection due to damage.2. Ductwork exposed and painted in finished spaces protected and handled as

decorative ductwork.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Ductwork Metal:1. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A525, lock-forming quality, 1.25 oz. zinc coating each

side.2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, AISI Type 316, No. 4 directional polish where

exposed to view.

B. Supply ductwork to be galvanized steel1. Kitchen Exhaust ductwork to be welded stainless steel.

C. Fire and Smoke Penetration Sealant: UL rated, flexible sealant, NEC 300-21.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Accessories:1. Fabricate ductwork with accessories such as air turns, extractors and volume

dampers; installed during fabrication to greatest extent possible.

B. Variation:1. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts from ASHRAE table of

equivalent rectangular and round ducts. Maintain clearances to obstructions.2. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission.

C. Directional Change:1. Construct tees, bends and elbows with radius minimum 1-1/2 times width of duct

on center line.

2. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows used, provide air foil type or other type turning vanes specified in Section 15910.


D. Size Change:1. Increase an decrease duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15o divergence and 30o

convergence, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.2. Maximum Divergence Upstream of Equipment: 20o and 30o convergence

downstream.3. Collars in caps not acceptable.

E. Seams and Joints: In accordance with SMACNA standards.1. Contractor's Option: Transverse joints.

a. Acceptable Manufacturer:(1) Ductmate Industries, Inc.: Ductmate System

2. Rigidly construct metal ducts with joints mechanically tight, substantially airtight, braced an stiffened so not to breathe, rattle, vibrate or sag.

3. Fabricate seams and joints liquid-tight with continuous exterior welds or gasketed, bolted flanged connections in kitchen or other high-grease content ductwork.

F. Maximum Air Leakage:1. Fabricate and seal ductwork to maintain following minimum air leakages, inward

or outward.a. Air Handled Each 50 Feet Main or Branch Duct: 1%.b. Total Leakage Any Complete System: 5% of total air handled.

G. Duct Gauges:1. Rectangular Ducts:

Maximum Width in Inches

Up to 12

Minimum USS Gauge

2613 to 30 2431 to 54 22

2. Round Ducts:

Duct Diameter in Inches Minimum USS Gauge

Up to 13 2614 to 22 24

H. Plenum Gauges: Same as associated duct system.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with SMACNA standards, to achieve airtight and noiseless systems; capable of performing each indicated service.1. Align ductwork accurately at connections.2. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors which will

hold ducts straight, plumb and free of sags and vibration.B. Electrical Equipment Spaces:


1. Do not run ductwork through or over transformer vaults and other electrical equipment or elevator spaces and enclosures.

C. Metal Duct Support:1. Support ductwork from building structure where not otherwise indicated.

a. Anchor with bolts, concrete inserts, steel expansion anchors, welded studs, C-clamps or special beam clamps.

2. Support vertical ducts, at 12-foot spacing, by attachment o adjacent vertical structural surfaces or by direct bearing at floor penetrations and similar locations.

3. Support horizontal ducts, located against structural walls and other similar adjacent vertical surfaces, at 8-foot spacing for ducts up to 40 inches horizontal dimension and 4-foot spacing for larger ducts.

4. Hang horizontal rectangular ducts from overhead structure, at 10-foot spacing for larger ducts.

5. Arrange hangers, supports and duct rests to permit free, unrestrained and noiseless expansion and contraction of duct.

6. Where duct lining is not used, vertical members may be fastened to duct sides with sheet metal screws.

D. Openings:1. Provide openings in ductwork to accommodate thermometers and controllers.2. Provide pitot tube openings for testing of systems; complete with metal cap with

spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage.3. Where openings are provided in insulated or lines ductwork, install insulation

material inside metal ring.

E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow for normal operating and maintenance activities.

F. Provide sleeved opening where ducts pass through smoke, fire and sound walls.1. Seal space between duct and sleeve airtight with mineral wool.2. Provide duct flange to cover and retain mineral wool.

G. Where ducts pass through fire-rated walls, partitions, floors and ceilings, seal openings in accordance with NEC 300-21.

H. Connections:1. Connect duct to equipment with flexible fabric, sheet metal clips, screws and

washers.2. Make branch take-offs at 45o angle with area at trunk duct 1-1/2 times area of

branch duct.a. Provide volume or splitter damper at each take-off.b. Prefabricated air scoops not acceptable.c. Form take-offs of same material as associated duct system.

3. Connect diffusers or troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 3-foot maximum length of flexible duct, held in place with strap or clamps.

I. Flexible Ductwork:1. Maximum Length: 3 feet, in accordance with NFPA 90.2. Install ductwork with minimum offsets and trim; not stretched between connection

points.


3. Connect with factory-installed compression coupling each end or provideseparate adjustable bond and clamp to secure duct to trunk fitting and to distribution unit fitting.

4. Where recommended by manufacturer, make connection with mastic duct tape and adjustable clamp.a. Seal end of flexible duct with tape so no insulations exposed.

5. Where metal ducts are lined, provide insulated flexible duct so no unlined metal duct is exposed.

6. Support ductwork as recommended by manufacturer' with wide sheet metal bends so area of flexible duct is not reduced at hanger.


A. Cleaning:1. Clean ductwork internally of dust and debris, unit-by-unit as installed.2. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive

deterioration of metal or where ductwork is to be painted.

B. Temporary Closure:1. At ends of ducts not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of

ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering until time connections are to be completed.

END OF SECTION

DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1

SECTION 233300 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

1 GENERAL


a. Access Doors.b. Fire Dampers.c. Balancing Dampers.d. Backdraft Dampers.e. Flexible Duct Connections.


A. DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

B. Section 23 01 00 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

C. Section 23 06 00 - TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING


A. Fire dampers shall be UL listed and constructed in accordance with UL Standard 555 Fire Dampers. Fire Dampers shall be rated for the protection required.

B. Fusible links on fire dampers shall be constructed to UL Standard 33, Fusible Links for Fire Protection Service, and so labeled for appropriate fire resistance and temperature.

C. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's representative.

D. Access doors shall be UL labeled, for rated protection required.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Accessories shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A, Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

B. Fabricate in accordance with ASHRAE handbooks and SMACNA duct manuals.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Divisions 1.

B. Submit shop drawings of factory fabricated assemblies.

C. Submit samples of shop fabricated assemblies as requested.

D. Submit manufacturers' printed installation instructions.


2 PRODUCTS2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Air Balance

B. Vent Products

C. Ruskin

D. Substitutions: Items of same function and performance are acceptable in conformance with Division 1.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS

A. Fabricate rigid and close-fitting hinged doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening cam locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover.

B. Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18 inch square, two hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to 24 inch x 48 inch.

C. Sizes:1. For 6" to 8" ducts: 6" x

6" (1 latch and 2 hinges).

2. For 10" to 12" ducts: 10" x 10"(1 latch and 2 hinges).

3. For 12" to 16" ducts: 12" x 12"(2 latches and 2 hinges).

D. Install at all fire dampers, smoke dampers, back draft, dampers, control dampers and all temperature controls otherwise not accessible.

E. Ceiling, wall, and floor access panels must line up with duct access doors.

2.3 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Fire Rating:1. Rated at 1-1/2 hours and so labeled.2. Rated at 1-1/2 hours and so labeled for up to 2 hour walls.3. Rated at 3 hours and so labeled for over 2 hour walls to 4 hour walls.

B. Multi-blade type or drop leaf types:1. Type A acceptable for all grilles and all ducts over 18" in height.2. Type B for ducts under 18" in height (100% free area). Contractor to verify

job site clearances for style B dampers before submitting same.3. Type C for all high velocity applications, round or oval; (100% free area).

C. All fire dampers to have 1/8: steel frames, 160 deg. F fusible link, 90 deg. blade


openings, for vertical or horizontal mounting as shown on drawings, indicator arm, spring catch, with safety key slot locking device (locks dampers in place when closed). Fire dampers size shall be the same size as connecting ductwork. Duct liner shall be interrupted at each fire damper.

D. Provide separate or integral collars as required with wall retaining angles, on both sides of walls, floors, ceilings, etc.

E. All horizontal fire dampers to be spring loaded to close.

F. Contractor to verify location to make sure that dampers are in correct location in fire walls or ceilings before installation. Discuss location with General Contractor before installation.

G. Provide access panels at all fire dampers. Label these access panels "F.D." Access panels must be located to provide access to the fusible links and resetting devices. Grilles are acceptable as access.

2.4 DAMPERS

A. Fabricated of galvanized steel, minimum 16 gage, and provide with quadrants or adjustment rod and lock screw. Must be capable of tight closing, with felt or vinyl edges.

B. Fabricated splitter dampers of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, properly stiffened to avoid vibration. Size on basis of straight air volume proportioning.

C. Fabricated single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 inch x 30 inch.

D. Fabricated multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 6 inch x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blade in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. Must be capable of tight closing, with felt of vinyl edges.

E. Construct damper blades for medium and high pressure systems to block a maximum of 70% of the air passage. Supply locking type handles.

F. Fabricated multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced backdraft dampers with blades a maximum of 6 inch width having felt or flexible vinyl sealing edges, linked together in rattle-free manner and with adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Fabricate of neoprene coated flameproof fabric (U.L. approved) approximately 4 inch wide tightly crimped into metal edging strip and attach to ducting and equipment by screws or bolts at 6 inch intervals.

2.6 APPLICATION

A. Provide access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Review locations


prior to fabrication.

B. Provide 6 inch x 6 inch quick opening access doors for inspection at balancing dampers.

C. Provide fire dampers at locations shown, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Fire dampers shall be complete with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings, and hinges.

D. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing.

E. Provide balancing dampers on high pressure systems where indicated. Use splitter dampers only where indicated on Drawings.

F. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated ducts associated with fans and equipment subject to forced vibration.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

B. For connections to medium and high pressure fans, install inch thick neoprene pad over fabric and hold n place with additional metal straps.

END OF SECTION

GENERAL PROVISIONS - ELECTRICAL 260100 - 1

SECTION 26 01 00 - GENERAL PROVISIONS, ELECTRICAL

1.1 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY

A. Contractor agrees to assume responsibility for liability, workmanship, and quality of materials concerning work sublet to others. Before contract is sublet, submit in writing the names of proposed subcontractor and obtain written approval.

1.2 CODES AND FEES

A. All work shall be installed in accordance with the applicable provisions of the local codes, the National Electrical Code, and the National Electrical Safety Code.

B. All electrical materials shall have Underwriters' approval where applicable, and shall be so labeled where UL labeling is customary.

C. All electrical equipment shall conform to applicable NEMA Standards whether specified hereinafter or not, and to other applicable Standards which may be specified hereinafter.

D. Make all arrangements with electric utility company for their services and metering work, PAY ALL CHARGES, AND INCLUDE THE COST IN CONTRACT PRICE.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining local permits, payment of fees and notification for inspection by code authorities consistent with the schedule of work. The contractor shall be responsible for obtaining state permits, payment of fees and notification for inspection by code authorities as required by the project.

1.3 EQUIPMENT LISTS, SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES AND SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of DIVISION 01 and General Conditions.

B. Submit to the Architect for approval, within 30 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed with the work, a complete list of materials, equipment and accessories proposed for use, including complete descriptions and specifications of any proposed substitutions, manufacturer's shop drawings, and roughing-in work. Submit five (5) copies of all items for approval and furnish additional copies if required for installation purposes. Electronic submittals are acceptable in PDF format.

C. Submission material and all shop drawings for the various items of equipment shall indicate section number and shall be marked with the respective mark number or identification of the equipment shown on the drawings or specified. The shop drawings shall list all ratings, capacities, accessories, and other pertinent data to show that the proposed item is as called for and as specified.

D. Shop drawings shall show sizes and details of required concrete and steel machine foundation, locations of anchor bolts, physical dimensions of equipment, capacity characteristics of equipment, and all other work pertinent to details. Concrete foundations are specified under "Concrete Work" section, but steel racks or stands for mechanical apparatus shall be furnished and installed as part of the mechanical work.


1.4 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Comply with Section GENERAL CONDITIONS.

B. Qualifications: Where specific qualifications are specified in individual specification section, provide required data with Subcontractor list.

1.5 GUARANTEE

A. Comply with Section GENERAL CONDITIONS

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Install all equipment in accordance with applicable manufacturer's drawings and recommendations.

B. Identification of circuits and equipment: Identification designations shall correspond to those indicated on electrical drawings and as specified in corresponding articles describing the equipment.

3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTS AND POWER

A. Provide temporary lights and power. Lights shall be one pigtail socket and lumens equivalent to a 150W incandescent lamp for each 500 sf building space, minimum one per room. Power outlets shall be provided as coordinated with construction. Temporary service connections and electrical charges shall be paid by the Contractor.

3.3 TEST, INSPECTIONS, ADJUSTMENTS, AND CLEANUP

A. Wiring, 600 volts and less: Make insulation tests with a "Megger", demonstrate that neither short circuits nor ground faults exist, and that wiring complies with NEC. Provide a copy of the insulation tests in the Close-Out documents.

B. Furnish suitable testing equipment, give the Engineer and all applicable authorities ample advance notice of all proposed tests and readiness of work for inspections, and conduct each test in their presence, as approved. Do not conceal electrical work until all necessary inspections have been made and all required tests have been approved by the Owner's Representative and all applicable authorities.

C. Put entire electrical system in operation, test all equipment, remedy all defects, and make all necessary adjustments. Demonstrate that the entire system functions satisfactorily, as specified, as indicated, and as approved.

D. After electrical system has been tested and before any field painting is commenced, clean up all electrical work thoroughly. Remove all foreign matter which has accumulated in all fixtures, equipment, and enclosures. Clean all fixture glassware and reflectors, and clean and polish all other surfaces that are not to be painted so that they present a new and acceptable appearance.

3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING


A. Work shall be protected at all times. Conduit openings shall be closed with caps or plugs until permanent connections are made. Fixtures and equipment shall be covered, if necessary, to protect against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage or defacement. The installation of fixtures liable to damage shall be coordinated with installing UL fire protective barriers and ceiling systems.

B. Electrical equipment rooms shall be cleaned up prior to energizing equipment and shall not be used for storage or other purposes after power is applied to the electrical equipments.

3.5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Furnish the services of personnel with experiences in the operation of an electrical system to instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of all equipment, for a period of not less than five working days.

B. Furnish and deliver to the Owner three sets of operating instructions for all equipment installed under this contract, including shop drawings, piping diagrams, wiring diagrams, maintenance recommendations and information concerning replacement parts.

C. All floor mounted electrical equipment shall be provided with 4” thick housekeeping pads which are 4 inches larger than the equipment.

END OF SECTION

BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 260500 - 1

SECTION 260500 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS, ELECTRICAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

1.2 O&M MANUAL

A. The preliminary O&M Manuals shall be submitted thirty (30) days after final submittal approval.

B. Provide an electronic copy in searchable Adobe PDF format.

1.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING FOR EQUIPMENT OF OTHER SECTIONS

A. General:

1. All electrical wiring of every description required to operate all equipment furnished by other Sections shall be done by the Electrical Section, except as otherwise specified hereinafter. Read carefully all other Sections in which electrically operated equipment is specified, and include in the electrical work all electric wiring required for the proper operation of the equipment, whether indicated on the electrical drawings or not. Coordinate the Electrical section work with that of all other Sections that furnish equipment requiring electrical connections.

2. All control devices required to operate the equipment shall be furnished by the Section that furnishes the equipment, unless otherwise specified. All control devices which are not factory mounted on the equipment and require electrical connections ONLY shall be installed by the Electrical Section. All control devices which are not factory mounted on the equipment and require piping, linkage, remote bulb, or other mechanical connections as well as electrical connections shall be installed by the Section that furnishes the equipment involved, ready for electrical connections.

3. Outlet locations indicated on the electrical drawings for motors, controls, and other electrically operated items of other Sections are APPROXIMATE ONLY, as the actual wiring requirements are not necessarily identical for the various makes of each item of equipment involved. However, the Electrical Section shall locate all outlets and arrange all wiring to properly serve the equipment ACTUALLY INSTALLED, generally as indicated on the electrical drawings, but EXACTLY in accordance with rough-in sheets and/or wiring diagrams furnished by the other Sections involved.

4. The necessary wiring diagrams shall be furnished by the Section that furnishes the equipment involved, and after these are approved, do all wiring accordingly.

B. Wiring NOT Included: Wiring which is factory installed on equipment.

C. Wiring Included: Generally equipment of other Sections requiring wiring, includes but shall not be limited to the following items:1. Plumbing: water heater.2. Door installation: automatic door equipment.3. Food service: equipment connections.4. Special construction: equipment connections.


5. Special type wire (other than type MTW): If any of this is required for other Divisions, that wire shall be furnished by the other Divisions and installed under this Division.

2.1 HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND SLEEVES

A. Securely attach all hangers, supports, and devices to the building structure with anchors suitable for the types of building construction involved. Provide all necessary pipe, angle iron, "Unistrut", "Kindorf", or other suitable steel auxiliary supports for the electrical work.

B. Hangers or supports for conduits and raceways shall be standard conduit or raceway straps, or other suitable clamping devices. Trapeze hangers may be used for groups of suspended horizontal conduits, with each conduit clamped to each trapeze bar. Perforated strap iron hangers will not be permitted.

C. Maximum hanger or support spacing for all conduits shall be as required by the Codes. Support non-concrete encased underground conduits by laying with full length bearing on firm trench bottoms. Support each riser conduit at each building floor level within one foot of floor, one foot of boxes, and every ten feet for vertical and horizontal runs; each run shall have at least one support.

D. Adequately support all boxes, gutters, panelboards, switches, starters, fixtures, and other devices, and equipment. Where supporting method is indicated or detailed, provide supports accordingly; OTHERWISE, supports shall be as required by the Codes, and as approved.

E. Provide all necessary sleeves for conduits and other electrical items passing through concrete and masonry construction, where electrical items are not installed prior to concrete placing and masonry laying. Sleeves through concrete walls, concrete columns, and concrete beams shall be IPS steel pipe or rigid steel conduit, flush with finished concrete surfaces. Sleeves for all exposed conduits passing through floors (except slabs on ground) where water on floor can pass through the opening shall be galvanized IPS pipe or galvanized rigid steel conduit extending two inches above finished floor, and flush with slab below. Other sleeves may be sheet metal or plastic.

2.2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS, EXCEPT UNDERGROUND DUCTS

A. Conduits: These shall be zinc coated rigid steel, zinc coated steel electrical metallic tubing (hereinafter referred to as "thin wall conduit"), ANSI Specification C80.5 rigid aluminum, Carlon Schedule 40 Certainteed PVC Schedule 40 or Cantex PVC Schedule 40 as approved UL listed heavy wall rigid PVC, as applicable. In each case where the conduit type is indicated, specified, or required by the Codes, install only the indicated, specified, or Code required type; OTHERWISE, conduit usage shall be as follows:1. Embedded in concrete: rigid steel coated with bituminous compound or PVC

coated.2. Conduit below grade shall be PVC encased in concrete as indicated.3. For supporting fixture, outlet boxes, and other devices and equipment which are

not directly anchored to the building structure: rigid steel or rigid aluminum conduit, with all joints and connections threaded.


4. Flexible connections: flexible steel conduit ("Greenfield"), in short lengths only, at each motor connection and other location requiring flexibility; of liquid tight type where exposed to weather or excessive moisture.

5. PVC conduit shall not be used in return air ceilings or plenums.6. Rigid metal conduit shall be used for service conductors entering and inside

building.7. Rigid metal conduit shall be used for fire pump service wiring and all runs

between controller and pump and other equipment. All conduit within a fire pump room shall be rigid metal conduit except flexible connections to motors may be liquid tight type flexible steel conduit.

8. All other locations: thin wall or rigid steel, as applicable.9. DO NOT INSTALL ALUMINUM CONDUIT UNDERGROUND, IN CONTACT

WITH GROUND, OR EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE.10. MC Cable is unacceptable, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. MC

Cable allowed on the documents shall be supported at twice the NEC recommendations and shall be used for runouts only. All homeruns shall be EMT.

11. Minimum 0.75” conduit except switch legs may be 0.5” conduit.

B. Conduit Fittings: For metallic conduit, fittings shall be zinc coated steel, cast aluminum, or cast zinc. For PVC conduit, fittings shall be of the same materials and make as those of the conduit. All fittings exposed to weather shall be weatherproof type.

C. Installation:

1. General: ream ends of all conduits after cutting. Prior to wire pulling, keep all open conduit ends plugged, and swab out all trapped conduits in which water or moisture has collected. Where conduits are concealed in walls, install these conduits so that the exposed wall faces will not be marred.

2. PVC conduits: solvent weld all joints between PVC materials, with cement furnished by the conduit manufacturer. Provide suitable adapters where PVC conduits are coupled to metallic conduits. Provide a rigid steel elbow at the base of each exposed riser from below ground and below floor to above ground and above floor.

3. Conduit routing, general: see TYPE OF SYSTEM, METHOD OF WIRING hereinbefore for locations where concealed and exposed conduits are required and/or permitted. Where conduit routings are detailed or dimensioned install conduits accordingly; OTHERWISE, install concealed conduits with the shortest practicable path, and install all exposed conduits in straight, level, and plumb lines, parallel with or at right angles with beams, walls, ceilings, and other building lines.

4. Branch circuit conduit routings: except where detailed or dimensioned, the indicated branch circuit conduit routings are generally diagrammatic, and are intended to show the required circuitry from panelboards to outlets. However, if necessitated by job conditions, deviations from the indicated routings may be made, provided that regardless of the actual installed arrangement of the conduits: each outlet marked with the same circuit number is connected to the same corresponding numbered circuit; outlets are switched and controlled as indicated; and no home run is brought into any switch box unless otherwise indicated.

5. Thin wall conduit: Use compression type fittings with proper tools for all joints and terminations. Point screw type fittings are allowed with proper installation methods.


2.3 UNDERGROUND DUCTS

A. General: Where indicated on the electrical drawings as "duct" or "ducts", underground conduits shall be PVC type, with concrete encasement.

B. Duct Materials and Joints:1. PVC conduit: This shall be Carlon Type EB or as approved, UL listed.2. Fittings: These shall include couplings, elbows (except the riser elbows

specified below), adapters, and other necessary types, all of the same material and make as those of the PVC conduit.

3. Joints between PVC materials shall be solvent welded type, made with cement furnished by the PVC conduit manufacturer.

4. Riser elbows: Provide a galvanized rigid steel conduit elbow at the base of each duct riser from below-ground and below-floor to above-ground and above-floor, coupled to the horizontal end of the PVC conduit with a suitable adapter.

5. Supports and spacers: Provide these as required to securely hold conduits in proper position prior to and during concrete placing, with required spacing between adjacent conduits.

C. Concrete Encasement: This shall be as detailed; if not detailed, concrete shall be at least 3" thick below, above, and on each side of the duct assembly. (Concrete by Concrete Section, with 5/8" maximum size aggregate).

D. Grounding Conductor: For each run of one or more PVC conduits in an underground duct assembly, provide a single stranded copper grounding conductor, buried directly in the ground above the concrete encasement, and connected to the above-ground metallic conduit system at each end of the duct run.

2.4 PULL BOXES, JUNCTION BOXES, AND WIRING GUTTERS

A. General: Pull boxes, junction boxes, and wiring gutters shall be of the types and minimum sizes indicated, or as required for the conditions involved where types and sizes are not indicated. Before installation, check proposed locations of boxes and gutters with the architectural, structural, and mechanical drawings, and locate each box and gutter so that it will be accessible in the finished project.

B. Underground Boxes: These shall be Hope HD6000 galvanized cast iron strictly watertight submersible type, with wide flanges on box top, neoprene cover gasket, cover bolted on with stainless steel bolts, and threaded hubs for all conduit connections.

C. Above Ground Boxes and Gutters: These shall be galvanized steel of at least Code gauge for each size involved, and of weatherproof construction where exposed to weather.1. Where indicated, boxes for under ground conduits shall be above ground and

encased in concrete pedestals, as detailed.

2.5 OUTLET BOXES

A. General: Outlet boxes and covers therefor shall be steel or cast ferrous metal with zinc or other suitable metallic rustproof coating, or cast aluminum, all of the proper


sizes and types to accommodate the conduits, conductors, connections, devices, fixtures, architectural conditions, and structural conditions involved.

B. Special Box Requirements:1. Exposed-to-weather outlet boxes shall be cast metal, with threaded hubs and

gasketed covers, all strictly weatherproof.2. Floor boxes for floor outlet devices shall be Steel City Series 88, with floor

adjusting rings and appropriate type floor plates for attaching the outlet devices thereto (does not apply to underfloor duct system).

3. Floor boxes for extensions from under floor conduits up to equipment connections and outlets above floor shall be Steel City Series 88, with floor adjusting rings and Series P90 floor plates; provide these ONLY where indicated, instead of stubbing conduits directly up above floor.

C. Installation:1. Before installation, check proposed location of each outlet box with the

architectural, structural, and mechanical drawings, and locate each outlet box so that it will be accessible and interference free in the finished project.

2. Set each concealed box flush with finished surfaces, and so that exposed finished surfaces will not be marred.

3. Install each wall switch on the knob side of the door involved. Before placing each wall switch box, verify the applicable door swing with the architectural drawings, and locate the wall switch box accordingly.

4. Where equipment is served by exposed flexible cords, locate the outlet box as near as practicable to the equipment connection point, to minimize flexible cord length.

2.6 WIRE, JOINTS, AND SPLICES, 600 VOLTS AND LESS

A. Lighting and power wire shall be copper only: Types shall be as follows:

1. Feeders shall be copper as indicated on single line diagram.2. High temperature and other special conditions: types NEC approved for the

conditions involved.3. Exposed flexible cords: Type S, with grounding conductor.4. Direct earth burial: Type USE, with neoprene jacket.5. All other lighting and power wire: No. 8 and larger, Type THWN stranded; No.

10 and smaller, Type THWN/THHN solid.

B. Control wire shall be Type MTW copper, stranded.

C. Signaling, sound, communications, alarm, indicating, and other special system wire shall be copper, of the types specified hereinafter with the equipment, or as indicated, or as recommended by the equipment manufacturers if neither indicated nor specified.

D. Wire Sizes: Where sizes are neither indicated nor otherwise specified wire sizes shall be:1. Branch circuit wire: No. 12.2. Control wire: No. 14, or as recommended by the control manufacturer.3. Special system wire: as recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment

involved.4. Home runs shall be 12 gauge if the distance from the panelboard to first outlet

is less than 100 feet; 10 gauge if distance is over 100 feet.


E. Identification:1. General: All wires shall be identified as required by NEC.2. Control and special systems wire: these shall be color coded throughout, or

identified at each terminal and junction point with a suitable permanently attached tag or label.

F. Joints and Splices: Make these with suitable solderless connectors, in the various boxes, gutters, and similar locations, but not in any conduit. Leave enough wire slack to permit at least one splice or joint to be remade in case of fault.1. Branch circuit, control, and special system wire joints: use Ideal, Buchanan,

3M, or similar tool-applied to twist-on type connectors.2. All other wire joints: use Ilsco tin plated aluminum type pressure connectors, or

suitable brass, bronze, or copper pressure type connectors.3. Insulate all joints and splices with suitable insulating sleeves or caps integral

with the connectors or separate therefrom, or with vinyl plastic insulating tape.

2.7 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION AND NAMEPLATES

A. Conductors identified by wire markers shall be branch circuits in the panel or panelboard and at the point of termination. The text shall be of black, non-smear ink. Text shall be pre-printed letters and numbers. Combinations of text and numbers shall be used to indicate the branch circuit or other use of the conductor or cable.

B. Disconnects, panelboards shall be identified with name plates with 1.5” black lettering with white background. Provide 1.5” white lettering with red background on all equipment served by generator.

C. Each panelboard shall be included with a label listing the following:1. Source info (fed from ____________)2. Voltage/Phase3. Current/Phase

D. Junction boxes and pull boxes shall be identified with the circuit numbers and panel designation in permanent marker or label.

E. All conduits shall be labeled with circuit numbers labeled with permanent marker at conduit entry into panelboard.

2.8 FUSES

A. General: Provide fuses of the indicated types and sizes, in place, for each device requiring fuses. Unless otherwise indicated, fuses shall be dual element non-renewable delay type. Fuses shall be Bussman, and Littlefuse.1. Spare Fuses: Furnish three spare fuses of each size and type required for the

electrical system, deliver these to the Owner's representative in a suitable clearly labeled box, and obtain signed receipt for delivery. Include this receipt in the Close-Out documents.

2.9 DISCONNECT SWITCHES, MOTOR STARTERS, AND SEPARATE CIRCUIT BREAKERS


A. General: Except as otherwise specified below, Electrical Section shall provide disconnect switches, circuit breakers, and motor starters for all motors and other electrically operated equipment, regardless of who furnishes and/or installs that equipment. Types and locations of these devices shall be as indicated, or as required where types and/or locations are not indicated.1. These devices which are located on other equipment shall be as specified

under the corresponding headings; these devices NOT located on other equipment shall be as specified below, and shall be separately mounted.

2. Separately mounted disconnect switches, circuit breakers, and motor starters shall be Square D, Allen-Bradley, ITE, or as approved. Enclosure types shall be: NEMA 3R for devices exposed to weather; NEC required type for devices in other special locations; and NEMA 1 type for devices in other locations. Each circuit breaker and each disconnect switch, including those integral with motor starters, shall have padlocking means.

3. All terminals for disconnect switches, circuit breakers and motor starters shall be rated and marked for 75 degrees C terminations.

B. Disconnect Switches: These shall be: non-fused heavy duty type safety switches where overcurrent protection is not required; and fused heavy duty type safety switches or circuit breakers (as indicated) where overcurrent protection is required; except that other suitable properly rated switches may be used for fractional hp motors and other small loads.

C. Circuit Breakers: These shall be molded case type. Breakers shall be quick make, quick break type with trip indications shown and with common trip handle on all multipole breaker.

D. Manual Motor Starters: These shall have neon motor running pilot lights and proper sized overload protective devices for the motors involved; and shall be surface mounted in equipment rooms and unfinished areas, and flush mounted in finished area. Where manual motor starters are not indicated, small manually controlled motors shall be controlled directly by the panelboard circuit breakers.

E. Magnetic Motor Starter: Each motor of 1/8 hp or larger shall be provided with thermal overload protection. Polyphase motors shall have overload protection in each ungrounded conductor. The overload-protection device shall be provided either integral with the motor or controller, unless otherwise specified, the protective device shall be of the manually reset type. Magnetic starters shall be NEMA size and type including the NEMA withstand ratings, with the automatic-control device actuating the pilot-control circuit. Each magnetic starter shall have a built in control circuit transformer to supply 120 volts to the control circuit. Each magnetic starter shall be provided with a three-position selector switch marked MANUAL-OFF-AUTOMATIC. Connections to the selector switch shall be such that only the normal automatic regulatory control devices will be bypassed when the switch is in the Manual position; all safety control devices, such as low or high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor-overload protective devices, shall be connected in the motor-control circuit in both the Manual and the Automatic positions of the selector switch. Two auxiliary contacts shall be a part of the starters. Control circuit connections to any MANUAL-OFF-AUTOMATIC switch or to more than one automatic regulatory control device shall be made in accordance with approved wiring diagram. All controls shall be 120 volts or less unless otherwise indicated. All motors with a rating of 50 hp and above shall have autotransformer reduced voltage starters; motors less than 50 hp shall be line voltage starters.


F. Identification of Separately Enclosed Devices: Identify each separately enclosed circuit breaker, disconnect switch, magnetic motor starter, and manual motor starter, by attaching to the device cover a metal or plastic nameplate clearly and permanently lettered with the description and location of the equipment controlled by the device.

G. Devices Furnished by Other Sections or Others:1. 3/4 hp and small single phase roof mounted fans: If the disconnect switches for

these are furnished with and factory mounted on the equipment; Electrical Section shall connect to fan motors and/or switches, as required. Verify that disconnects are furnished by others.

2.10 DEVICES

A. General:1. Wiring devices shall be Hubbell, Leviton, or other makes as approved or as

specified below or on drawings. Type of wiring devices required for this project shall be as indicated on the drawings, or suitable for the application involved if type is not indicated; qualities, ratings, and other requirements of wiring devices shall be as specified below. All wiring device types specified below may not necessarily be required for this project.

2. Receptacle configurations shall conform to NEMA standards unless otherwise noted.

3. Exposed finish shall be: for each device with a plastic plate, same color as that of plate; for devices with stainless steel plates, brown; and for all other devices, brown or black. Hospital grade, isolated ground receptacles and emergency devices shall be marked by symbol on the face. Coordinate device and plate color requirements with architect.

B. Devices: Qualities, ratings, and other requirements shall be: (All models are based on Hubbell – other manufacturers are Leviton or as approved)1. Wall switches: 20A 120-277VAC, single or double pole, 3 or 4 way, as

applicable; Hubbell 1221 series. Where indicated as WEATHERPROOF, the above specified switch, Hubbell 7420. Wall switches with occupancy sensors as shown on drawings.

2. Momentary contact switches: 20A 120-277 volt, SPDT, three position with center off; Hubbell 1557 series.

3. Door switches: Hubbell RDS50.4. Duplex receptacles: (Commercial) 20A 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding:

Hubbell 5362. Where indicated as WEATHERPROOF the above specified duplex receptacle Hubbell 5206WO, double lift spring door cover.

5. Ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles: (Commercial) 20A 125 volt feed through duplex 5ma sensitivity type with test and reset buttons; Hubbell GF5362. Where indicated as WEATHERPROOF, the above specified receptacle with Hubbell CWP26H spring door cover.

6. Single Receptacle: (Commercial) 20A 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding Hubbell 5361. Single receptacles: 30A, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding; Hubbell No. 9308.

7. Single receptacles: 20A, 250 volt, 2 pole 3 wire grounding; Hubbell 5461.8. Flush floor receptacles: 20A 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding; above specified

single receptacle with Steel City 889 and P-90-2 receptacle and floor plates.9. Standing floor receptacles: 20A 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding; above

specified duplex receptacle in Steel City SFH-40 or equal outlet fitting.10. Other devices not specified above; as indicated on the drawings.


C. Device Plates: Unless otherwise specified or inapplicable to the devices involved, plates shall be: emergency circuit devices as selected by Architect, plastic; isolated ground receptacles, as selected by Architect. In finished areas device plate colors shall be as selected by Architect, and unfinished areas, brown plastic for flush devices, and zinc coated steel for surface devices.1. Identification of Emergency System Receptacles: Emergency system

receptacles shall be red in color.2. Identification of Data Processing Equipment Receptacles: These shall be

engraved or hot stamped "Data Processing Equipment Only".

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Run exposed conduit, trays, and other wireways parallel to the principal parts of the building. Wireways shall be run concealed when provisions are made in floors, walls, ceilings, and chases through all finished areas. Fire stop all openings around conduit which penetrates floors and walls with approved non-combustible materials, slabs on grade are accepted.

B. Conduits and other raceways shall be kept as close as possible to ceilings, walls, columns, etc., and shall be installed in such an orderly manner as to take up a minimum of space and allow a maximum of headroom, per applicable codes.

C. Circuiting: Circuit numbers shown on drawings indicate specific panelboard to which each branch circuit shall be connected, and specific outlets which shall be connected to each branch circuit, and unless otherwise indicated these circuit numbers do not necessarily indicate actual number of circuit breaker in each panel to which each branch circuit shall be connected. Connect each outlet marked with same circuit number to same numbered branch circuit, and connect each branch circuit to indicated panelboard. In each individual panelboard:1. Balance active circuits on panelboard busses, and leave spare circuit breakers

equally divided among panelboard busses, as nearly as practicable.2. Connect each ungrounded wire of each 3 and 4 wire common neutral circuit to

a different panelboard bus.3. Group conveniently at top of panelboard all breakers used for switching lights

not having wall or other switches, and neatly paint handles of all such breakers with white durable quick drying automobile touch up or other similar type lacquer for each identification as light switches. This does not apply to any panelboard in which ALL circuit breakers serve as lighting switches.

D. Provide templates, layouts drawings, and supervision to ensure correct placement of anchors and conduit projecting in concrete.

E. Painting shall be done to repair scratches to surfaces, electrical equipment nameplates shall be protected from paint.

F. Qualifications: Where specific qualifications are specified in individual specification section, provide required data with Subcontractor list.

3.2 TYPE OF SYSTEM, WIRING METHOD

A. Electrical system characteristics: These shall be as indicated. In addition, whether indicated or not, provide low voltage (less than 120 volts) wiring for controls and other purposes, as required for the complete electrical system.


B. Enclosures: Regardless of voltage or use, install wiring in conduits and metal or other enclosures, unless otherwise indicated or otherwise specified.

C. Finished Areas: Conceal conduits below floors, within slabs, within walls, within pipe chases, above suspended ceilings, and within other building construction, in offices, rest rooms, and other finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Unfinished Areas: Install above-floor conduits exposed in areas where pipe chases or suspended ceilings are not indicated or concealing is otherwise impractical, in mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, manufacturing areas, warehouse or storage areas, and other unfinished areas.

E. Flexible Cords: Exposed flexible cords approved for the purpose involved shall be used to connect equipment where indicated or specified, and where equipment is factory furnished with or factory arranged for flexible cord connections only. However, in each such case, install the supply outlet as near as practical to the equipment served thereby, and use the shortest practical length of exposed flexible cord between the equipment and the outlet. If a receptacle is used as an outlet, the receptacle and the cord plug shall be 3 or 4 wire (as applicable) grounding twist-lock type.

F. Ground electrical equipment and conductors as required by NEC and other applicable electrical codes.1. Panelboards served by individual transformers: ground panelboard neutral

busses to building grounding system.2. All metallic cable sheaths, cable shields, metal conduit, transformer cases,

cabinets and pedestals shall be made electrically secure to form a continuous system and shall be grounded.

3. The neutral shall only be grounded at the panelboard or service grounding device. Grounding conductors shall be continuous between the service and the driven grounding electrode or other grounding electrode as permitted in Part H of NEC Article 250.

4. All conduits shall have code sized green equipment grounding conductors with diameter based on the largest circuit in each conduit.

3.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

A. Excavate and backfill as required for the electrical work. Cut bottoms of trenches to the proper lines and grades to provide firm and continuous support for the underground electrical work, and to provide 24 inch MINIMUM depth from finished grade to tops of all exterior underground electrical work. Sheet and brace excavations as required to protect personnel and adjacent structures.

B. After the underground electrical work has been installed and approved, place all backfill in 8 inch maximum thickness loose layers, and compact each layer to at least the density of the adjacent undisturbed site soil, using pneumatic or other suitable power tampers. Mass backfilling (backfilling without tamping) is prohibited.

C. Warning tape for buried electrical work: install detectable warning tape directly over every device by burying tape as close to the surface as possible but no less than six inches beneath finished grade. Tape shall be Reef Industries, Inc., "Terra Tape D", or equal as approved, composition metallized foil-plastic film laminate bearing


imprint describing the type of buried electrical work. All materials shall be specifically formulated for prolonged use underground.

3.4 FIRE WALL PENETRATIONS

A. Four hour fire walls shall not be penetrated with conduit runs. Conduit runs shall be routed under the floor in these areas. UL listed approved fire stops shall be provided for all two hour wall penetrations.

3.5 FEEDER, STARTER, SWITCH, PROTECTIVE DEVICE, AND OTHER ELECTRICAL DEVICE SIZES

A. Capacities of feeders, motor starters, circuit breakers, switches, protective devices, and other electrical devices indicated to be furnished and installed by Electrical Section for electrically operated equipment, regardless of who furnishes and/or installs that equipment, are based upon the average horsepower and/or electrical ratings. HORSEPOWER AND/OR ELECTRICAL RATINGS OF ELECTRICALLY OPERATED EQUIPMENT INDICATED ON ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS SHALL NOT LIMIT SIZES OF THE ELECTRICALLY OPERATED EQUIPMENT AND CAPACITY OF THE ELECTRICAL WORK.

1. Equipment electrical requirements are based on the specified manufacturer and model. Alternate equipment and model revisions result in electrical load variations and is the responsibility of the contractor. Before commencing electrical work for electrically operated equipment, Electrical section shall: check horsepower and/or electrical rating of each individual electrically operated equipment items, regardless of who furnishes and/or installs that equipment; and adjust sizes of all applicable feeders, motor starters, circuit breakers, switches, protective devices, and other electrical devices furnished by Electrical Section, as required to provide proper protection and satisfactory operation of the electrically operated equipment actually installed. This includes increasing to next larger size, or decreasing to next smaller size, all feeders, circuit breakers, starters, switches, protective devices, and other electrical devices involved, as required to match capacities of corresponding electrically operated equipment actually installed, except that no sizes shall be decreased without approval.

B. Switches, circuit breakers, motor starters, protective devices, and other electrical devices furnished by other Sections and by others for installation and/or wiring by Electrical Section, are specified elsewhere to have adequate capacities to serve the electrically operated equipment for which they are furnished. However, BEFORE installing and/or wiring each of these devices, Electrical Section shall check each individual device's electrical rating with the horsepower and/or electrical rating of the corresponding electrically operated equipment actually installed, regardless of who furnishes and/or installs the devices and equipment. Electrical Section shall not install and/or wire any device that is found to be the incorrect size, and shall see to it that correctly sized devices are furnished by the applicable Section and other applicable persons in all cases.

C. The intent and requirement of the above is to obtain a coordinated electrical system and all of the above shall be done by Electrical Section as part of the contract, at no extra cost to the Owner.


END OF SECTION

GROUNDING AND BOUNDING 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING

1.1 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

B. Submit shop drawings for final approval.

C. Clearly detail shapes, general construction, and installation details.

D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

E. Submit samples of the following for final approval.

2.1 GROUNDING CABLES

A. Materials:1. Grounding conductors shall be tinned soft drawn annealed copper, size and type

as follows:a. Grounding for stress relief cones and splices shall be No. 4 AWG, solid, soft

drawn annealed.b. All other grounding required minimum No. 4 AWG solid soft drawn annealed

unless otherwise specified.2. Grounding conductors shall be tinned soft drawn annealed copper, size and types

as follows:a. From primary riser pole to 3-phase transformer No. 2 AWG bare stranded.

B. Joints and splices: Make these with suitable copper compression connectors, in manholes and pull boxes, but not in any conduit. Leave enough wire slack to permit at least one splice or joint to be remade in case of damage.

2.2 INSTALLATION OF GROUNDING SYSTEM

A. Underground Distribution:1. Ground:

a. On site, outdoor electrical equipment to driven ground rods.b. Interrupted metallic raceways, with ground conductors connected to metallic

raceway at each end.c. Transformer and secondary neutral; to driven ground rods including:

(1) Cable shielding.(2) Metallic raceways.(3) Hardware.(4) Grounding conductors.

B. Pull Boxes and Manholes:1. Ground:

a. On site pull boxes and manholes to the grounding system including:(1) Cable shielding.(2) Metallic raceways.(3) Hardware.(4) Ground conductors.

b. Interrupted metallic raceways, with ground conductor connected to metallic raceways at each end.

GROUNDING AND BOUNDING 260526 - 2

3.1 FIELD TESTING OF GROUNDING ELECTRODE

A. The ground rod electrode in the transformer pad shall have a resistance to ground test performed. The test shall be made with a self-contained direct reading meter such as "Vibroground" or "Groundohmer".

B. The maximum resistance to ground shall not exceed 25 ohms with all grounding leads disconnected from the electrode at temperatures above 32 degrees Fahrenheit and soil moisture content above 20 percent.

C. If the resistance to ground of the existing electrode exceeds 25 ohms install additional grounding electrodes as necessary to obtain the specified resistance. Additional electrodes shall be minimum 3/4 inch diameter by eight foot in length, copper-clad steel.

D. Where rock is encountered and the electrodes cannot be vertically driven their full length install a grounding trench system consisting of an 18 inch minimum depth trench and place within the trench a single conductor No. 2/0 AWG stranded bare copper wire connected to the electrode. The length of wire shall be such that the specified resistance can be obtained and the minimum length shall be 100 feet.

E. The grounding trench shall be located in an area and position such that surface activities will not disturb the system. Location of the trench shall be approved by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION

PANELBOARDS 260926 - 1

SECTION 260926 - PANELBOARDS

1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the panelboards as specified and as shown on the contract drawings.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The panelboards and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of NEMA and UL as follows:1. UL 67 - Panelboards2. UL 50 - Cabinets and boxes3. NEMA PB14. Fed. Spec. W-P-115C5. Circuit breaker - Type I class I6. Fusible switch - Type II class I

1.3 SUBMITTAL - FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL

A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer:1. Breaker layout drawing with dimensions indicated and nameplate designation2. Component list3. Conduit entry/exit locations4. Assembly ratings including:

a. Short-circuit ratingb. Voltagec. Continuous current

5. Cable terminal sizes6. Product data sheets

B. Where applicable, the following additional information shall be submitted to the Engineer:

1. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations

1.4 SUBMITTAL FOR CONSTRUCTION

A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes:1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in Paragraph 1.04, and

shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process2. Installation information3. Seismic certification and equipment anchorage details as specified

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly.

B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.


C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. The panelboards shall be UL labeled.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment.

1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly shipped and shall include instruction leaflets, instruction bulletins and renewal parts lists where applicable, for the complete assembly and each major component.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Square D.

B. Eaton / Cutler-Hammer products.

C. Siemens

2.2 RATINGS

A. Panelboards rated 240 Vac or less shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on the drawings or as herein scheduled, but not less than 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical.

B. Panelboards rated 480 Vac shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on the drawings or as herein scheduled, but not less than 14,000 amperes RMS symmetrical.

C. Panelboards shall be labeled with a UL short-circuit rating. When series ratings are applied with integral or remote upstream devices, a label or manual shall be provided. It shall state the conditions of the UL series ratings including:1. Size and type of upstream device2. Branch devices that can be used3. UL series short-circuit rating

2.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled. They shall be designed such that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and


without removing the main bus connectors.

B. Trims for branch circuit panelboards shall be supplied with a hinged door over all circuit breaker handles. Doors in panelboard trims shall not uncover any live parts. Doors shall have a semi flush cylinder lock and catch assembly. Door-in-door trim shall be provided. Both hinged trim and trim door shall utilize three point latching. No tools shall be required to install or remove trim. Trim shall be equipped with a door-actuated trim locking tab. Equip locking tab with provision for a screw such that removal of trim requires a tool, at the owners option. Installation shall be tamper resistant with no exposed hardware on the panelboard trim.

C. Distribution panelboard trims shall cover all live parts. Switching device handles shall be accessible.

D. Surface trims shall be same height and width as box. Flush trims shall overlap the box by 3/4 of an inch on all sides.

E. A directory card with a clear plastic cover shall be supplied and mounted on the inside of each door. Provide all information on directory card as indicated in specifications.

F. All locks shall be keyed alike.

G. Provide a pad-lockable handle lock hasp. The pad lockable lock hasp allows the handle to be locked in the ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle lock holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) The hasp can be mounted on either side of the handle. The hasp will accommodate up to three padlocks with 1/4 inch (6.4mm) shackles. One per circuit breaker.

2.4 BUS

A. Main bus bars shall be copper sized in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 65 degrees C above an ambient of 40 degrees C maximum. Aluminum bus bars are acceptable where aluminum conductors are being utilized.

B. A system ground bus shall be included in all panels.

C. Full-size (100%-rated) insulated neutral bars shall be included for panelboards shown with neutral. Bus bar taps for panels with single-pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral busing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. 200%-rated neutrals shall be supplied for panels designated on drawings with oversized neutral conductors.

D. Provide provisions for isolated ground as indicated on the drawings.

2.5 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. The minimum short-circuit rating for branch circuit panelboards shall be as specified herein or as indicated on the drawings. Panelboards shall be fully rated. Panelboards shall be Cutler-Hammer type Pow-R-Line 1a, Pow-R-Line 2a, Pow-R-Line 3a, or equivalent.

B. Bolt-on type, heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, single- and multi-pole circuit breakers of the types specified herein, shall be provided for each circuit with toggle


handles that indicate when unit has tripped.

C. Circuit breakers shall be thermal-magnetic type with common type handle for all multiple pole circuit breakers. Circuit breakers shall be minimum 100-ampere frame and through 100-ampere trip sizes shall take up the same pole spacing. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed as type SWD for lighting circuits.1. Circuit breaker handle locks shall be provided for all circuits that supply exit

signs, emergency lights, energy management, and control system (EMCS) panels and fire alarm panels.

D. Circuit breakers shall have a minimum interrupting rating of 10,000 amperes symmetrical at 240 volts, and 14,000 amperes symmetrical at 480 volts, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

2.6 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS - CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE

A. Distribution panelboards with bolt-on devices contained therein shall have interrupting ratings as specified herein or indicated on the drawings. Panelboards shall be fully rated. Panelboards shall be Cutler-Hammer type Pow-R-Line 3a or Pow-R-Line 4B. Panelboards shall have molded case circuit breakers as indicated below.

B. Where indicated, provide circuit breakers UL listed for application at 100% of their continuous ampere rating in their intended enclosure.

C. Provide shunt trips, bell alarms, and auxiliary switches as shown on the contract drawings.

D. Breakers feeding fire alarm and security systems shall have lock-on breaker, with appropriate warning labels on associated panels.

2.7 ENCLOSURE

A. Enclosures shall be at least 20 inches wide made from galvanized steel. Provide minimum gutter space in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a panel are carried through its box to supply other electrical equipment, the box shall be sized to include the additional required wiring space. At least four interior mounting studs with adjustable nuts shall be provided.

B. Enclosures shall be provided with blank ends.

C. Where indicated on the drawings, branch circuit panelboards shall be column width type.

2.8 NAMEPLATES

A. Provide an engraved nameplate for each panel section, as detailed in specifications.

2.9 FINISH

A. Surfaces of the trim assembly shall be properly cleaned, primed, and a finish coat of gray ANSI 61 paint applied.

2.10 LABELING (PANEL SCHEDULES)


A. All circuit directories shall include room numbers and descriptions.B. All circuit directories shall be typewritten. Handwritten directories are not acceptable.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. The Contractors shall install all equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendations and the contract drawings.

END OF SECTION

LUMINAIRES 265500 - 1

SECTION 265500 - LUMINAIRES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services to achieve a luminaire installation complete with lamps, completely wired, controlled and securely attached to supports, as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein or both.

B. Type of luminaire shall be as indicated and as specified. Where luminaire type has been omitted either on “Lighting Fixture Schedule” or on floor plans or details, Contractor shall request clarification from the Architect prior to submitting bids.

C. Luminaires shall be selected from the fixture schedule not only by catalog number but with consideration to mounting, number, and type of lamps and reference notes all as contained in the “Lighting Fixture Schedule” and in accordance with these Specifications.

1.3 STANDARDS

A. All luminaires shall be listed by and carry the Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) label.

B. Luminaires shall be labeled with the Underwriters Laboratories (U.L) label appropriate to luminaires’ location (Damp Location, Wet Location, etc.)

C. All luminaires shall meet all required codes and regulations for the application.

D. All luminaires shall be new, clean, and undamaged.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 260100.

B. Submit product data for each catalogued luminaire indicating pertinent photometric and physical characteristics.

C. Submit complete detailed shop drawings by the manufacturer for each custom luminaire type.


D. Submittals shall indicate name of project, fixture type, and all necessary data for review.

1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Equality will be based on upon the following characteristics of the proposed alternate product:1. Photometric performance2. Construction quality, including materials and finish3. Ease of installation and maintenance4. Appearance5. Manufacturer’s performance record of support in correcting defects and delivery

problems.6. Delivery schedule.

B. If deemed necessary in the opinion of the Architect, proposed alternate product may be required to be tested by independent authorities or testing laboratories to confirm performance and construction. If independent tests are required, all costs associated with those test will be paid in advance by the business entity requesting alternate product approval.

C. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to inform the Architect of any differences between the specified luminaire and the proposed substitution. Failure to do so shall be grounds for rejection of the proposed substitute at any time before or after the bids are received.

D. Final determination of equality shall be the responsibility and judgment of the Architect.

E. Modifications required to any building equipment or system due to the substitution of a luminaire type shall be designed and constructed at the Contractor’s expense.

1.6 INTERFACE

A. Confirm compatibility and interface of luminaire with ceiling system prior to ordering luminaires. Report discrepancies to the Architect and defer ordering until clarified.

B. Coordinate luminaire voltages with all circuitry prior to ordering luminaires. Report discrepancies to the Architect and defer ordering until clarified.

C. Coordinate installation of luminaires with other trades to provide a total system that is neat and orderly in appearance. Confirm absence of conflicts with all walls, structure, ducts, pipes, or other equipment prior to ordering luminaires. Report discrepancies to the Architect and defer ordering until clarified.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE

A. Refer to the “Lighting Fixture Schedule” for individual luminaire descriptions and manufacture type.

2.2 GENERAL MATERIALS

A. Recessed luminaires shall have trims which fit neatly and tightly to the surfaces in which they are installed. Where gaskets are required, all gasketing material shall be concealed.

B. Luminaires shall be free of light leaks and shall be designed to provide adequate cooling of electrical components.

C. All painted luminaire components shall be painted after fabrication.

D. Wiring channels and lampholder mountings shall be rigid and accurately made.

E. Lampholders shall hold lamps securely against normal vibrations.

2.3 RECESSED LUMINAIRES

A. Recessed fluorescent, LED, incandescent, and high intensity discharge (HID) luminaires: Prewired type with junction box and flexible conduit forming an integral part of the assembly.

B. Supply recessed luminaire complete with trim type required for ceiling system installation. Before ordering, confirm ceiling construction details and architectural finish for each area.

C. Provide integral encapsulate ballasts for recessed high intensity discharge luminaires.

D. Recessed fluorescent, LED, incandescent, and high intensity discharge (HID) luminaires installed in non-accessible ceilings shall be bottom access type, i.e., luminaire component shall be removable from below for access to junction box.

E. Fixtures flush mounted in fire-rated ceiling shall be furnished with the followings nonstandard features:1. Fixture housing shall not be less than twenty gauge steel.2. Aluminum radiator shall be provided for ballast mounting.3. Ballast mounting provisions shall provide for mounting with four bolts; other type

mounting are not acceptable.

F. Troffers shall be constructed of not less than 20 gauge steel or 16 gauge rigid construction aluminum and suitable for continuous row mounting where indicated. Hinged doors for support of diffuser shall be gasketed on all sides to prevent light leaks.


G. Reflective surfaces which are painted shall be baked white enamel of minimum average reflectance of 85%. Paint coverage shall be complete without raw or unpainted surfaces or edges.

H. Recessed lay-in luminaries shall conform to NEMA standards including references to luminaire dimensions and temperature ratings.

I. Lenses and diffusers shall be of 100% virgin acrylic of the pattern indicated and shall be of 0.125” minimum thickness for 2’x4’ and smaller panels and of 0.156” minimum thickness for large panels unless otherwise shown. Minimum thickness shall be defined as the measurement from the base side of the panel to the top of the prism. Lens shall be supported within hinged door frame in not less than six points and in such a manner to prevent vibration of the lens.

2.4 PHOTO CONTROL FOR LIGHTING

A. Photo control shall be self-contained turn lock type head with three EEI-NEMA twist type blades and receptacle with weatherproof housing, photocell, relay, and lightning arrester for surge protection. Unless indicated the dual voltage type responding between 105 and 277 volts shall be used. Rating of contacts shall be 1800 volt amps, for operating minimum 1000 watt lamp load Photocell shall be Tork 2100 Series or equal. Receptacle and mounting shall be included. Cover system in this article is intended for protection of CPVC piping in low-hazard occupancy applications. It also is used to improve the appearance of other piping. See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming manufacturers. See Section 016000 "Product Requirements."

2.5 DIGITAL LIGHTING TIMERS

A. Timer shall be a Tork 7-Day Digital Time (Model EW101B) or an approved equal digital, astronomic timer with emergency reserve power supply.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install the fixtures where indicated on the architectural ceiling plan. Fixture counts shall not be altered without approval from the engineer.

B. Recessed fixtures mounted in gyp-board ceiling systems shall be provided with the appropriate flange kit as required for proper installation.

C. For lighting fixtures installed in suspended ceiling earthquake clips shall not be used. For seismic design the fixtures shall be bolted to the ceiling grid. Seismic bracing shall be provided for all surface mounted lighting fixtures. See drawings for details.

D. All luminaires weighing more than 20 pounds shall be directly suspended from the building structure.


E. Supply plaster frames, trim rings, and backboxes to other trades as required.

F. Coordinate with other Divisions of these Specifications to avoid conflict between luminaires, supports, fittings, mechanical equipment, piping, structure, etc.

G. Pendant mounted fixtures shall have stem supported by a fixture and stud mounted in the outlet box.

3.2 RECESSED LUMINAIRES

A. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below, to gain access to outlet or prewired fixture box.

B. Connect recessed luminaire to boxes with flexible conduit and fixture wire. Maximum fixture whip shall not exceed 8 feet and shall not be used to extend to additional fixtures. Fixture whips shall be no smaller than #14 AWG.

C. Support recessed fluorescent luminaires from the building structure by installing ceiling system suspension wire or fixture chains on two (2) diagonal corners of each luminaire. Ceiling system hold-down clips are not acceptable. Note only applicable in seismic zones.


A. Align luminaires one week prior to final acceptance. Replace broken lenses or damaged reflectors. Clean all open reflectors with soft cloths. Remove fingerprints and other blemishes. Refer to lighting fixture schedule for lamping requirements.


COMMUNICATIONS 277440 - 1

SECTION 277440 - COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Provide conduit for owner’s data, security, and other systems as specified hereinafter and as indicated on the drawings. All cabling is to be provided by the owner. Contractor shall provide all raceways, conduit, boxes, and pull strings.

B. Locations of the various components of each system shall be as indicated on the drawings, unless otherwise specified hereinafter.

C. All communications shall be separate from electrical power throughout the system of conduit, raceways, boxes, cabinets and devices.


A. DIVISION 9 - FINISHES.

B. DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL.

C. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL.

D. Section 16010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS, ELECTRICAL.

E. Section 16050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS, ELECTRICAL.

1.3 COMPUTER NETWORK COORDINATION

A. Coordinate all work with Owner’ staff or Owner’s preferred vendor prior to commencing all work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DATA SYSTEM

A. Provide conduits, outlets, and boxes as indicated.

B. Conduit shall be as specified hereinbefore: Telephone - -1.25 inch MINIMUM size. Data -- 1.25 inch MINIMUM size unless otherwise indicated from indicated outlets to accessible corridor ceiling space.

C. Provide bushings on all conduits stubbed into ceiling spaces and at all conduit sleeves through which cables will be extended.

D. Provide a system of 4" j-hooks at 4 feet intervals down both sides of each corridor.Align 24" above the ceiling along each wall. J-hooks shall only be provided in areas without cable tray, as indicated on the drawings.

COMMUNICATIONS 277440 - 2

E. Telephone outlets shall be on walls: standard outlet box, with RJ-11 jack and telephone plate to match wiring device plates. Data outlets shall be on walls: 4" x 4" x 2 1/8" outlet box with adapter ring and blank single gang device plate. See other sections for additional data systems information.

F. Telephone terminal boards shall be 3/4 inch thickness A-D grade plywood, sizes as indicated, each secured to wall with at least 4-1/4 inch bolts.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF DATA SYSTEMS

A. In accordance with accepted industry standards and all local and national codes having jurisdiction.

B. The data wiring and devices will be installed by the Owner.

C. Firestopping compound shall be installed for all raceway penetrations into fire walls and into corridor ceiling spaces. Coordinate with requirements of Section FIRESTOPPING.

END OF SECTION